Description of Functions 11/2003 Edition

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
ShopMill
 Hardware 1
Supplementary Conditions 2
Reserved Functions 3
Installation and Start-Up 4
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
PLC Program 5
ShopMill Signal Description 6

Description of Functions Maschine Data 7

Tool Management 8
Additional Functions 9
Customer-Specific
Operator Interface 10
Miscellaneous 11

Abbreviations A
References B

Valid for Index C

Control Software version
SINUMERIK 840D powerline 6
SINUMERIK 840DE powerline 6
SINUMERIK 840Di 2
SINUMERIK 840DiE (export version) 2
SINUMERIK 810D powerline 6
SINUMERIK 810DE powerline 6

11.03 Edition
SINUMERIK Documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each edition is shown by the code in the “Remarks” columns.

Status code in the “Remarks” column:

A . . . . . New documentation.
B . . . . . Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C . . . . . Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition,
this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.

Edition Order No. Remarks

10.97 6FC5 297-2AD80-0BP0 A
11.98 6FC5 297-2AD80-0BP1 C
03.99 6FC5 297-5AD80-0BP0 C
08.00 6FC5 297-5AD80-0BP1 C
12.01 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP0 C
08.03 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP1 C
11.03 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP2 C

This book is part of the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)

Edition Order No. Remarks
03.04 6FC5 298-7CA00-0BG0 C

Trademarks
SIMATICr, SIMATIC HMIr, SIMATIC NETr, SIROTECr, SINUMERIKr and SIMODRIVEr are trademarks of
Siemens. Other product names used in this documentation may be trademarks which, if used by third
parties, could infringe the rights of their owners.

Further information is available on the Internet under: Other functions not described in this documentation might be
http://www.ad.siemens.de/mc executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an
obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.
This publication was produced with Interleaf V7.
We have checked that the contents of this publication agree with the
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its hardware and software described here. Nevertheless, differences
contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are
will be liable for damages. All rights, including riths created by patent completely identical. The information given in this publication is
grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. reviewed at regular intervals and any corrections that might be
necessary are made in the subsequent printings. Suggestions for
improvement are welcome at all times.
 Siemens AG, 1997–2003. All rights reserved Subject to changes without prior notice.

Order No. 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP2 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Printed in Germany
Preface

Structure of The SINUMERIK documentation is divided into 3 different levels:

documentation
S General Documentation
S User Documentation
S Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Target group This document is intended for the manufacturers of vertical machining centers
or universal milling machines incorporating SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D.

Objective The Installation and Start-up Guide provides you with all the relevant informa-
tion required to configure, install and start-up ShopMill.

Note
This Description of Functions is valid for ShopMill SW 6.3.

Hotline If you have any questions about the control, please contact the hotline:
A&D Technical Support Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
Email: [email protected]
Please send any questions about the documentation (suggestions for improve-
ment, corrections) to the following fax number or email address:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98-2176
Fax form: See reply form at the end of the manual
Email: [email protected]

Internet address http://www.cnc-werkstatt.de

http://www.ad.siemens.de/mc

SINUMERIK 840D From 09.2001 SINUMERIK 840D powerline and SINUMERIK 840DE powerline
powerline will be available with improved performance. For a list of available powerline
modules, please refer to the following Hardware Description:
References: /PHD/, Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 840D

SINUMERIK 810D From 12.2001 SINUMERIK 810D powerline and SINUMERIK 810DE powerline
powerline will be available with improved performance. For a list of available powerline
modules, please refer to the following Hardware Description:
References: /PHC/, Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 810D

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition v
Preface 11.03

Standard scope This document provides information about the control system design and the
interfaces of the individual components. It also describes the start-up and
installation procedure for ShopMill with SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D.
For detailed information about individual functions, function assignment and
performance data of individual components, please refer to the appropriate
document for the subject concerned (e.g. manuals, function description etc.).
User-oriented activities such as the creation of parts programs and control
operating procedures are described in details in separate documents.
Further descriptions of tasks to be performed by the machine tool manufacturer
are also available for the standard SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D. We may
refer to them in this manual if appropriate.

Searching aids In addition to the table of contents, we have provided the following information
in the appendix for your assistance:
1. Index of abbreviations
2. List of references
3. Index
For a complete list and description of the ShopMill alarms, please refer to
References: /BAS/, ShopMill Operator’s Guide
The SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D alarms are also listed in
References: /DA/, Diagnostics Guide
For further useful information on start-up and troubleshooting, please refer to
References: /FB/, D1, “Diagnostics Tools”

Notes The following symbols with special significance are used in the documentation:

Note
This symbol appears in this document to draw your attention to information
relevant to the subject in hand.

Warning notes The following warning notes with varying degrees of severity are used in the
documentation:

Danger
! Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

vi SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 Preface

Warning
! Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

Caution
! Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property da-
mage.

Caution
Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

Notice
Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not
avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.

Unit In this manual, the units of the parameters are always indicated as metric val-
ues. The following table shows the corresponding units in inch.

Metric Inch
mm in
mm/tooth in/tooth
mm/min in/min
mm/rev in/rev
m/min ft/min

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition vii
 Preface 11.03

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

viii SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Contents
1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
2 Supplementary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3 Reserved Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
4 Installation and Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.1 Preconditions for software start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.2 Initial start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.1 Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.2 Installing ShopMill on PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.2.3 Installing ShopMill on PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.2.4 NC start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.5 PLC start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.2.6 Adapt display machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.2.7 Acceptance report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.3 Series start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.4 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
5 PLC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.1 Structure of the PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.2 Overview of blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.3 ShopMill PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.4 ShopMill interface DB 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.5 Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.6 OB 1 and OB 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.7 Machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.8 Diagnostics function for start-up purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
6 Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6.1 HMI interface DB19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6.2 Overview of ShopMill interface DB82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6.2.1 Signals to ShopMill (input signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6.2.2 Signals from ShopMill (output signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
6.2.3 Diagnostics buffer signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.3.1 Signals to ShopMill (input signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.3.2 Signals from ShopMill (output signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6.3.3 Description of diagnostics buffer signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition ix
Contents 11.03

7 Machine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79

7.1 NC machine data for ShopMill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
7.2.1 Overview of display machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
7.2.2 Description of display machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
8 Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101
8.1 Overview of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101
8.2 Start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
8.3 Start-up in the NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
8.3.1 Input of the NC machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
8.3.2 Description of NC machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107
8.3.3 Creating and loading the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
8.4 Start-up in the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119
8.4.1 Example for FC 100 and FB 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-121
8.4.2 Signal description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
8.5 Display machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130
8.6 Tool change cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
8.7 Manual tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-134
8.8 Activating the spindle, coolant, and tool-specific functions . . . . . . . . . 8-135
8.9 Modifying texts for tool-specific functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-137
8.9.1 PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-137
8.9.2 PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-139
8.10 Configuring the operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-141
8.10.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-141
8.10.2 Creating a configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-143
8.10.3 Defining texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-147
8.11 Import tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-149
9 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-153
9.1 Measuring cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-153
9.1.1 Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-153
9.1.2 Probe connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-154
9.1.3 Functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-156
9.1.4 Probe start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-158
9.1.5 Machine data for measuring cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161
9.1.6 Display machine data measuring cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-162
9.2 Network link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-169
9.2.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-169
9.2.2 Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill (PCU 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170
9.2.3 Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill (PCU 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171
9.3 Cylinder surface transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-173
9.3.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-173
9.3.2 Example of how to set an axis configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174
9.4 Swivel heads and tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

x SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 Contents

9.5 Multiple clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-177

9.6 Measuring cycle support in the G code editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-179
10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-181
10.1 Configuring the customer booting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-181
10.1.1 PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-181
10.1.2 PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-182
10.2 Configuring the user screen form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-183
10.2.1 Transferring cycles to the machining plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-185
10.2.2 Linking cycles into the machining plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-186
10.2.3 Linking measuring cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-187
10.3 ShopMill Open (PCU 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-188
10.3.1 Basic menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-188
10.4 User status display (PCU 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-189
10.5 OP hotkeys, PLC keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-191
11 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-193
11.1 Access protection via password and keyswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-193
11.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-193
11.1.2 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-195
11.1.3 Keyswitch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-196
11.1.4 Machine data for protection levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-197
11.2 ISO dialects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-198
11.3 Spindle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-199
11.4 Automatically generated programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-200
11.5 Version display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-201
11.6 Mold making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-202
11.6.1 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-202
11.6.2 Data storage, data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-204
A Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-205
B References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-209
C Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-223

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition xi
Contents 11.03

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

xii SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Hardware 1
System structure The hardware structure of ShopMill corresponds to the SINUMERIK
810D/840D/840Di standard.
References: /PHC/, SINUMERIK 810D, Configuring Manual
/IAC/, SINUMERIK 810D, Installation & Start-up Guide
/PHD/, SINUMERIK 840D, Configuring Manual
NCU 561.2-573.3
/IAD/, SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D,
Installation & Start-up Guide
/HBI/, SINUMERIK 840Di, Manual

Table 1-1 Basic components

Basic components Order number Remarks

CCU3 (810D) 6FC5410–0AY03–0AA1
NCU571.4 (840D) 6FC5357–0BB12–0AE0
NCU572.4 (840D) 6FC5357–0BB23–0AE0
NCU573.4 (840D) 6FC5357–0BB34–0AE0

Table 1-2 Operator components

Operator components Order number Remarks

OP010 operator panel 6FC5203-0AF00-0AA0
OP010C operator panel 6FC5203-0AF01-0AA0
OP010S operator panel 6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0
OP012 operator panel 6FC5203–0AF02–0AA0
OP015 operator panel 6FC5203-0AF03-0AA0

PCU 20 with system software 6FC5210–0DF00–0AA1 166 MHz, 32 MB

PCU 20 with system software 6FC5210–0DF00–1AA1 233 MHz, 32 MB
PCU 50 6FC5210–0DF21–2AA0 566 MHz, 256 MB, Windows XP
PCU 50 6FC5210–0DF22–2AA0 1.2 GHz, 256 MB, Windows XP

19” machine control panel 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 Standard/U.S. layout

Key cap for 19” machine control 6FC5148–0AA13–0AA0 90, gray
panel 6FC5148–0AA14–0AA0 16, transparent with stickers
Full OP032S CNC keyboard 6FC5203-0AC00-1AA0 Standard/U.S. layout
Machine control panel OP032S 6FC5203-0AD10-1AA0 Standard/U.S. layout

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 1-13
1 Hardware 11.03

Table 1-2 Operator components

Key cap for OP032S full CNC 6FC5248-0AA02-0AA0 Standard/U.S. layout

keyboard and OP032S machine
control panel
Mini handheld unit 6FX2007-1AD00

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

1-14 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Supplementary Conditions 2
Observe the following conditions when using ShopMill:

S ShopMill is only executed in channel 1, mode group 1.

S The standard MPI bus addresses must not be changed for the PCU 20,
PCU 50, NC, and PLC.

S Up to 5 axes plus a spindle are displayed on the ShopMill operator interface.

S The machine axes are assigned to fixed numbers (1=X, 2=Y, 3=Z).
S The spindle can be assigned to axis numbers 4, 5, or 6.
S ShopMill is executed only with tool management.
The change position must always be spindle 1 (see configuration file).
The loading point can be 1 or 2
(see MD 9673 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION).

S In ShopMill Classic, the position of the “ShopMill” softkey (switch from the
CNC-ISO user interface to ShopMill) must not change, i.e. in the REGIE.INI
file this function must always be assigned Task6.

S In ShopMill Open, you must not change the positions of the following soft-
keys on the basic menu bar, i.e. a certain task must always be assigned to
these functions in the REGIE.INI file.
Task 0 (horizontal softkey 1): Machine operating area
Task 1 (horizontal softkey 2): Program manager operating area
Task 2 (horizontal softkey 3): Program operating area
Task 4 (horizontal softkey 5): Tools/zero offsets operating area

S You can use only one operator panel with ShopMill.

S Handheld programming unit (HHU) in addition to ShopMill on PCU 50 on
request only.

S The HMI and Windows screen savers must not be used at the same time.
References: /IAM/, IM2 Installation and Start-up of HMI Embedded
IM4 Installation and Start-up of HMI Advanced
J

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 2-15
2 Supplementary Conditions 11.03

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

2-16 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Reserved Functions 3
The following functions are utilized by ShopMill and must not be assigned for
other purposes.

Extended M functions with extended address:

M functions M[value]=100
M[value]=101
M100 and M101 are defaults and must be changed where required.
1st extended M address:
DB82.DBB12 ext_m_cmd_1, default=100
Display MD 9684 CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1, default=100
2nd extended M address:
DB82.DBB13 ext_m_cmd_2, default=101
Display MD 9685 CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2, default=101

PROG_EVENT The system cycle “PROG_EVENT.SPF” is used by the standard cycles and by
ShopMill.
If you want to use cycle “PROG_EVENT.SPF” for user functions, too, you must
implement these user functions in cycle “CYCPE_US.SPF”. Place cycle
“CYCPE_US.SPF” in the user cycles or manufacturer cycles directory.
J

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 3-17
3 Reserved Functions 11.03

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

3-18 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Installation and Start-Up 4
4.1 Preconditions for software start-up

Data For data communication, you require:

communication
S Hardware
– Programming device, e.g. a PG 740 or a PC with MPI module
– Cable for RS-232 PG/PC-NC (Order No.: 6FX2 002-1AA01-0BF0)
– Cable for MPI bus (Order No.: 6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0)
– PCMCIA card
This PCMCIA card can be used for the NCU/CCU or for the PCU 20.
The PCMCIA card is referred to by the following terms for easier distinc-
tion in the start-up sections:
– For the NCU/CCU “NC card”
– For the PCU “PC card”

S Software
– SIMATIC Step7, SW 4 and later (see SIMATIC catalog for order number)
– PCIN (Order No. see Catalog NC Z)
– SINUCOPY-FFS for PC card or NC card

ShopMill The ShopMill software package to be installed comprises the following:

software package
S ShopMill for PCU 20
S ShopMill for PCU 50
S Toolbox
S PLC Toolbox
The floppy disks are available on the ShopMill CD-ROM. The files must be cop-
ied to the hard disk of a PC/PG. The procedure for further installation of the soft-
ware on PCU and NC/PC is described in the following sections on installation
and start-up.
The ShopMill CD-ROM also includes the NC standard software releases for
SINUMERIK 810D/840D. These can be loaded onto a PCMCIA card using SI-
NUCOPY-FFS.

Note
The exact contents of the ShopMill CD-ROM can be found in file siemensd.txt
(German) or siemense.txt (English).
You can find a compatibility list in file compat.xls.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-19
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.1 Preconditions for software start-up

ShopMill The system diskettes contain the system software in five languages (German,
for PCU 20 English, French, Italian, and Spanish).

Note
When installing the system diskettes please follow the instructions in file
Sys_read.txt on the system diskette.

The application software allows you to modify the parameters of the PCU 20
applications and thus to:
– Set the foreground and background languages
– Change user texts
– Change display machine data and
– Change the MPI parameters (NETNAMES.INI)
– Add to PLC alarm texts

Note
When installing the application diskettes please follow the instructions in file
App_read.txt on the application diskette.

ShopMill The system diskettes contain the system software in five languages (German,
for PCU 50 English, French, Italian, and Spanish).

Note
When installing the system diskettes please follow the instructions in file
Sys_read.txt on the system diskette.

Toolbox The Toolbox contains the following ShopMill data:

– ShopMill machine data blocks
– Cycles, definitions (macros, GUD), and examples
– Configuration files for the tool management function

PLC Toolbox The PLC Toolbox contains:

– ShopMill PLC program for 8x0D
– SINUMERIK add-on for Step 7
– NCVar selector
Besides the ShopMill PLC blocks, the ShopMill PLC program also contains the
blocks of the PLC basic program.
Installation is supported by menu guidance and an install shield.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-20 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.1 Preconditions for software start-up

Note
Please read the information in file siemensd.wri (German) or siemense.wri
(English) in the PLC Toolbox.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-21
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

4.2 Initial start-up sequence

4.2.1 Sequence

Before you begin with start-up please read the supplementary conditions and
restrictions.
Please proceed as follows to install and start up the NC:
1. Installation ShopMill on PCU
2. NC start-up
3. PLC start-up
4. Adapt display machine data
5. Install additional functions (optional)
6. Customize the user interface (optional)
7. Test using the acceptance report
You can perform tool management start-up either together with NC and PLC
start-up or afterward. If tool management has already been installed on the ma-
chine, you only have to adapt the display machine data for tool management
(see Section 8.2 “Start-up sequence”).

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-22 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

4.2.2 Installing ShopMill on PCU 20

When you install ShopMill on the PCU 20 the HMI Embedded software is auto-
matically installed with it, that means, you do not have to install the HMI Em-
bedded software on the PCU 20 separately.
ShopMill is installed on the PCU 20 by means of PC card.

Note
ShopMill uses the alarm texts and PLC messages of the CNC ISO operator
interface. For detailed information, please refer to the following publication:
References: /IAM/, Installation & Start-up Guide HMI 840D/840Di/810D

Installation via the

PC card
Installing the system disks on PC/PG

1. Call program sys_inst from system disk 1.

2. Select option <1> “Install System disk on hard disk”.
3. Specify the drive on which you wish to install the system disks.
4. Specify the directory in which you wish to install the system
disks. sys_inst suggests \hmi_0_2.sys. You can change this if
necessary.
5. sys_inst may require you to insert the 2nd system disk.
6. Exit the program with <ESC>.

Installing the application disks on a PC/PG

1. Call program app_inst from application disk 1.

2. Specify the drive on which you wish to install the application
disks.
3. Specify the directory in which you wish to install the applica-
tion disks. app_inst suggests \hmi_0_2.app. You can change
this if necessary.
4. app_inst may require you to insert the 2nd application disk.
5. Exit the program with <ESC>.

Fig. 4-1 Installing on a PC/PG

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-23
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

Installing the application disks on PC card

1. Switch to the directory instutil of the application software, e.g.

\pcu20.app\instutil (the directory specified during installation of
the application disks on the PC/PG).
2. Call app_inst.
3. You may change the configuration as required (e.g. user texts,
PLC texts, alarms, select languages, select blocks for
installation, etc.).
4. Return to the main menu by pressing Esc.
5. Select option <1> “Install all modules on hardware”.
6. Select option <2> “Create Flash Memory Card image”.
7. Specify the source directory in which file sys_inst is stored.
8. Specify the target directory to which you wish to copy the sy-
stem/application image file.
File PCU20.ABB is created.
9. Insert the PC card into the PCMCIA slot of the PC/PG.
10. Transfer the created image file to the PC card using SINU-
COPY-FFS.

Fig. 4-2 Creating a PC card

Note
You do not need to copy the system software to the PC card separately as it is
automatically copied over with the application software.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-24 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

Loading the PC card into the PCU 20

1. Switch off the control.

2. Insert a PC card with new PCU SW release.
3. Switch on the control.
4. Press key 6 when the message “PCU 20 Boot Software” ap-
pears on the screen while the PCU 20 is booting.
5. Select option <0> “Update from PC Card”.
6. When data comparison has been completed, the message:
“Remove PC card” appears.
7. On removal of the PC card, the control boots and starts up
automatically.

Fig. 4-3 Loading the PC card into the PCU 20

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-25
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

4.2.3 Installing ShopMill on PCU 50

The HMI Advanced software must be installed on the PCU 50 before you install
ShopMill.
When you install ShopMill on the PCU 50, you can choose the ShopMill variant
you wish to use, i.e. ShopMill Classic or ShopMill Open. ShopMill Classic is the
software package previously marketed under the name ShopMill. For informa-
tion about ShopMill Open, please refer to Section 10.3 “ShopMill Open”.

Note
ShopMill uses the alarm texts and PLC messages of the CNC ISO operator
interface. For detailed information, please refer to the following publication:
References: /IAM/, Installation & Start-up Guide HMI 840D/840Di/810D

You can install ShopMill on the PCU 50 in one of three different ways:

S Installation via parallel interface (FAT 32)

S Installation via floppy disk drive
S Installation via a network link

Installation via
parallel interface
(FAT 32) Preconditions:
1. The interlnk.exe application must be installed on the PC/PG.
2. The following line must be present in the config.sys file of the
PC/PG:
device = [path]\interlnk.exe /auto
([path] = path of interlnk.exe file, e.g. c:\programs)
3. Connect PCU 50 to parallel interface of the PC/PG.

Activate the PCU 50:

4. Switch on the control and when the message “Sinumerik”
appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press the “Cursor down” key
and then “Enter”.
5. Select option <8> “Start PC Link”.
6. Enter the password.
7. Intersvr opens.

Fig. 4-4 Installation via parallel interface (FAT 32)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-26 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

Installing the software:

8. Restart the PC/PG.
9. Copy the contents of the system disk on the Windows
interface of the PC/PG to d:\install on the PCU 50. Do not
copy over the disk directories themselves.
Note:
Once the PC/PG has rebooted, the PCU 50 displays the drive on
the PC/PG that corresponds to drive D on the PCU 50, (e.g.
D: equals F:, i.e. the files must be copied to drive F).
10. Close Intersvr on the PCU 50 with Alt+F4.
11. Installation is menu-driven.
12. Select the ShopMill variant.

Fig. 4-5 Installation via parallel interface (FAT 32)

Installation via
floppy disk drive

1. Switch on the control and when the message “Sinumerik”

appears as the PCU50 is booting, press the “Cursor down” key
and then “Enter”.
2. Select Option <1> “Install/Update SINUMERIK System”.
3. Enter the password.
4. Select option <1> “Install from Floppy Disk”.
5. Insert the first disk and follow the menu.
Note:
You must copy the files to drive F.
6. Select the ShopMill variant.
7. After installing the software, power down the PCU 50 with “Exit”
and then reboot it again.

Fig. 4-6 Installation via floppy disk drive

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-27
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

Installation via net- The software is first transferred from the PC/PG to D:\Install on the PCU 50 and
work link then automatically installed when the PCU 50 next boots.
In the example given below, the PC/PG has computer number r3344 and the
software to be installed is stored in directory SHOPMILL\SM_INST.

Preconditions:

S PC/PG with Windows NT4 or Windows95/98

S Set protocol NETBEUI on the PC/PG
Start –> Settings –> Control Panel –> Network –> Con-
figuration tab –> “Add”: NETBEUI

S Determine the computer name of the PC/PG:

Start –> Settings –> Control Panel –> Network –> Iden-
tification tab –> “Computer Name”: e.g. r3344

S Share the directory on the PC/PG in which the software

to be installed is stored:

PC/PG with Windows NT4:

Assign a share name (e.g. SHOPMILL)
Enter share authorization (e.g. User1 [local user] or
“anyone” with “read” access)

PC/PG with Windows 95/98

Enter a share name (e.g. SHOPMILL)
Enter access authorization
Assign password if necessary

S Select share level on a PC/PG with 95/98:

Start –> Settings –> Control Panel –> Network –> Ac-
cess Control tab –> Select “Share Level”

S Connect the PC/PG and PCU 50 using an Ethernet

cable of type “Converted Twisted Pair”

Activate the PCU 50:

1. Switch on the control and when the message
“Sinumerik” appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press
the “Cursor down” key and then “Enter”.
2. Select Option <1> “Install/Update SINUMERIK
System”.
3. Enter the password.
4. Select option <3> “Install from Network Drive”.
5. Select option <1> “Connect to Network Drive”.

Fig. 4-7 Installation via a network link

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-28 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

Make connection to the PC/PG:

6. Enter a user name and password with which the
software can be fetched from the shared directory
on the PC/PG (remember password can be con-
firmed).
PC/PG with Windows NT4:
User name and password of a local user of the
PC/PG.
PC/PG with Windows 95/98:
Optional user name, password identical to password
specified for shared directory (if applicable).
7. Enter drive letter under which the PC/PG is displayed
on the PCU 50.
E.g.: H
8. Enter the computer name of the PC/PG and directory
name (share name) of the PC/PG to be accessed.
E.g.: \\r3344\Shopmill
9. The following message appears on the PCU 50:
Connected Network Drive (last):
H: (\\r3344\SHOPMILL)
Install Directory: F:\Install
Note:
F:\Install is a default setting and can be changed.
10. Select option <4> “Change Install Directory”.
11. Enter drive letter under which the PC/PG is displayed
on the PCU 50 and a subdirectory if applicable.
E.g.: H:\SM_INST

Start transmission and software installation:

12. Select option <5> “Install from H:\SM_INST”.
13. Software transfer from the PC/PG to D:\INSTALL on the
PCU 50 commences.
After the software has been transferred, the PCU 50 is
automatically restarted and the transferred software is
installed under menu guidance.
14. Select the ShopMill variant.

Fig. 4-8 Installation via a network link

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-29
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

If you want to display all connected drives, proceed as follows:

1. Switch on the control and when the message

“Sinumerik” appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press
the “Cursor down” key and then “Enter”.
2. Select Option <1> “Install/Update SINUMERIK
System”.
3. Enter the password.
4. Select option <3> “Install from Network Drive”.
5. Select option <2> “Show connected Network Drives”.

Fig. 4-9 Show connected drives

If you want to disconnect from all network drives again, proceed as follows:

1. Switch on the control and when the message

“Sinumerik” appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press
the “Cursor down” key and then “Enter”.
2. Select Option <1> “Install/Update SINUMERIK
System”.
3. Enter the password.
4. Select option <3> “Install from Network Drive”.
5. Select option <3> “Disconnect from all Network Drives”.

Fig. 4-10 Disconnect from network drives

Language The ShopMill software package includes five languages (German, English,
French, Italian and Spanish).
The foreground language is always German.
To select the background language, press the softkeys “MMC” and “Languages”
in succession in the “Start-up” operating area on the CNC ISO operator inter-
face and mark the desired language.
Use the “Change Language” softkey to toggle between the foreground and
background language in the “Start-up” area of the CNC ISO operator interface.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-30 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

4.2.4 NC start-up

Start-up of the NC includes the following items:

S Install axes and spindles

S Load ShopMill machine data, definitions and cycles
S Set up tool management
You only have to set up the axes and spindles if you have not yet done so on
the machine. Please observe the supplementary conditions when setting up the
axes and spindles (see Chapter 2 “Supplementary Conditions”).
In the same way, you only have to set up tool management in the NC if none yet
exists.
NC start-up is different for the SINUMERIK 840D/810D and SINUMERIK 840Di.

SINUMERIK
840D/810D

yes Is the software ver-

sion installed on
the NC?

no

Preconditions:
NC card with 8 MB memory and required
NCK software release

Insert the NC card

Load the software to RAM
– Start-up switch=1 (reset NCK)
– Start-up switch=0 (NCK reset)

Enter password for the machine

manufacturer

If the axes and spindles have not yet

been set up:

Adapt standard MDs to the axes and

spindles of the machine.

Transfer MD from directory tools\md\...

MVAR3A1S.8X0 (3 axes/1 spindle)
MVAR4A1S.8X0 (4 axes/1 spindle)

Fig. 4-11 Start-up NC SINUMERIK 840D/810D

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-31
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

NCK reset

If the axes and spindles have not yet

been set up:

Adapt standard MDs to the axes and

spindles of the machine.

Transfer MD from directory tools\md\...

MVAR3A1S.8X0 (3 axes/1 spindle)
MVAR4A1S.8X0 (4 axes/1 spindle)

Transfer ShopMill MD from directory

tools\md\CMM.8X0
(see Section 7.1 “NC machine data for
ShopMill”)

Set axis machine data $MA_SPIND_AC-

TIVE_AFTER_RESET 35040=2 manu-
ally for the spindle

Note: If you want to install additional

ShopMill definitions and cycles you must
increase the size of the memory.

NCK reset

Machine Test configuration without drives

Configure axes and start Set the speed ranges for

up drives the spindles.

For example, for 4 axes/

1 spindle transfer SIM.8x0
from directory tools\md

NCK reset

Fig. 4-12 Start-up NC SINUMERIK 840D/810D

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-32 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

PCU 20 PCU 50

Load definitions from di- Import definitions

rectory: tools\cycles\de- SM_DEF.ARC from PCU 50
fine archive

Activate files SMAC.DEF

Load files
and GUDx.DEF (x = 5, 6,
SMAC_xx.DEF (xx = sc,
7) with the “Activate” soft-
sm) and GUD7_xx.DEF
key
(xx = sc, js, sm) with the
“Load” softkey

Transfer cycles from di-

rectory: tools\cycles Activate files SMAC.DEF
and GUDx.DEF (x = 5, 6, 7)
with the “Activate” softkey

Import cycles
SM_CYC.ARC from PCU 50
archive

Load the these cycles with

“Load” softkey.
Note: The cycles are lo-
cated in directories Stan-
dard Cycles and Manufac-
turer Cycles.

NCK reset

If tool management has not yet been

installed:

Create and load the configuration file for

the tool management (see Subsection
8.3.3 “Creating and loading the configura-
tion file”).

For example, transfer data from directory

tools\sd\...
TM_WO_GR.8x0 (configuration without
dual gripper)
TM_W_GR.8x0 (configuration with dual
gripper)

Fig. 4-13 Start-up NC SINUMERIK 840D/810D

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-33
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

SINUMERIK 840Di In NC start-up in the SINUMERIK 840Di, the cycles are not stored in the SRAM
as in the SINUMERIK 840D/810D but in the DRAM.
For this, you require the software option “Cycle storage separate from CNC user
memory” with order number 6FC5 251–0AF00–0AA0.

Enter password for the machine

manufacturer

If the axes and spindles have not yet

been set up:

Adapt standard MDs to the axes and

spindles of the machine.

Example:
In one of the two files stated in directory
tools\md\..., comment out MD 13010
$MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR_[0] to
$MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR_[14] (i.e. put
“;” in front of the line) and transfer the re-
quired file.
MVAR3A1S.8X0 (3 axes/1 spindle)
MVAR4A1S.8X0 (4 axes/1 spindle)

NCK reset

If the axes and spindles have not yet

been set up:

Adapt standard MDs to the axes and

spindles of the machine.

Example:
In one of the two files stated in directory
tools\md\..., comment out MD 13010
$MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR_[0] to
$MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR_[14] (i.e. put “;”
in front of the line) and transfer the re-
quired file.
MVAR3A1S.8X0 (3 axes/1 spindle)
MVAR4A1S.8X0 (4 axes/1 spindle)

Fig. 4-14 Start-up NC SINUMERIK 840Di

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-34 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

In file tools\md\CMM.8X0, comment

out MD 19250
$ON_USER_MEM_BUFFERED (i.e. put
“;” in front of the line) and transfer the
ShopMill MD (see Section 7.1 “NC ma-
chine data for ShopMill”)

Set axis machine data $MA_SPIND_AC-

TIVE_AFTER_RESET 35040=2 manu-
ally for the spindle

Note: If you want to install additional

ShopMill definitions and cycles you must
increase the size of the memory.

NCK reset

Machine Test configuration without drives

Configure axes and start Setting the speed ranges

up drives for the spindles.

For example, for 4 axes/

1 spindle transfer SIM.8x0
from directory tools\md

NCK reset

Set the following MDs to store the cycles in the DRAM:

11290 $MN_DRAM_FILESYSTEM_MASK, bit 0 or bit 0
and 1
18332 $MN_MM_FLASH_FILE_SYSTEM_SIZE=1500
18351 $MN_MM_DRAM_FILE_MEM_SIZE = 1000

Fig. 4-15 Start-up NC SINUMERIK 840Di

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-35
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

PCU 20 PCU 50

Load definitions from di- Import definitions

rectory: tools\cycles\de- SM_DEF.ARC from PCU 50
fine archive

Activate files SMAC.DEF

Load files
and GUDx.DEF (x = 5, 6,
SMAC_xx.DEF (xx = sc,
7) with the “Activate” soft-
sm) and GUD7_xx.DEF
key
(xx = sc, js, sm) with the
“Load” softkey
Transfer cycles from di-
rectory: Tools\cycles
Activate files SMAC.DEF
and GUDx.DEF (x = 5, 6, 7)
with the “Activate” softkey

Import cycles
SM_CYC.ARC from PCU 50
archive

Load the these cycles with

“Load” softkey.
Note: The cycles are lo-
cated in directories Stan-
dard Cycles and Manufac-
turer Cycles.

NCK reset

If tool management has not yet been

installed:

Create and load the configuration file for

the tool management (see Subsec-
tion 8.3.3 “Creating and loading the con-
figuration file”).

For example, transfer data from directory

tools\sd\...
TM_WO_GR.8x0 (configuration without
dual gripper)
TM_W_GR.8x0 (configuration with dual
gripper)

Fig. 4-16 Start-up NC SINUMERIK 840Di

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-36 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

4.2.5 PLC start-up

To start up the PLC you must first create and then load a PLC user project.
A more detailed description of the PLC blocks is given in Chapter 5 “PLC Pro-
gram”.

Note
Before commencing with start-up, set the parameter mnemonic to German in
the SIMATIC manager under menu Options → Customize → Language.

Proceed as follows to start up the PLC:

Preconditions:
ShopMill machine data are loaded

Reset memory on the PLC

Memory capacity after reset 96 KB

Install the ShopMill library on the PG/PC:

Start install shield with setup.exe. Installation is
menu-guided.
Note: The catalog name of the library is SMxxy-
yzz (xxyyzz = version number)

Copy all program blocks and source files from

the ShopMill library into the PLC user project
(see Section 5.2 “Overview of blocks”).

If tool management has not yet been installed:

Implement FC8 call and generate PLC data
(DB4) (see Section 8.4 “Start-up in the PLC”).
For example, compile a source file:
TM_WO_GR.AWL (data transfer without dual
gripper)
TM_W_GR.AWL (data transfer with dual grip-
per)

Fig. 4-17 PLC start-up

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-37
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.2 Initial start-up sequence

Supply ShopMill interface DB82 in PLC user

program Part 1 (see Section 5.4 “ShopMill inter-
face DB82”).

For example, compile a source file:

S FC90_OP32S.AWL
S FC90_MSTT19.AWL
Note: The generated blocks are stored in the
user area and must be adapted to match the
machine.

Call ShopMill PLC program in OB1 and OB100

(see Section 5.6 “OB1 and OB100”).

For example, compile a source file:

S GPOB810D.AWL (SINUMERIK 810D)
S GPOB840D.AWL (SINUMERIK 840D/840Di)

Load PLC user project into PLC

Fig. 4-18 PLC start-up

4.2.6 Adapt display machine data

Once you have completed installation of ShopMill on the PCU and start-up of
the NC and the PLC you must adapt the display machine data.
The display machine data are to be found in Section 7.2 “Display machine data
for ShopMill”.

4.2.7 Acceptance report

You can use the acceptance report to conduct a test of the installed ShopMill
functions after completion of ShopMill start-up.
You will find the acceptance report on the ShopMill CD-ROM.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-38 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 4 Installation and Start-Up
4.4 Upgrade

4.3 Series start-up

Series start-up is used to install software on several machines.

When upgrading several machines, a standard software installation is carried
out on the 1st machine (see Section 4.2 “Initial start-up”) and then an NC and a
PLC archive are set up which are then read onto the other machines.
When creating or restoring these series start-up archives, you can choose be-
tween four different storage media:

S PG
The start-up archives are saved on a programming device connected via the
RS-232 interface. Please refer to the details for series start-up in the follow-
ing publication:
References: /IAD/, Installation and Start-Up Guide SINUMERIK 840D
/IAC/, Installation and Start-Up Guide SINUMERIK 810D
/HBI/, Manual SINUMERIK 840Di

S NC card
The free memory (approx. 2 MB) on the NC card (PCMCIA card) can be
used to save the start-up archive it contains.

S Hard disk (PCU 50 only)

The start-up archives are saved to hard disk.

S Diskette (PCU 50 only)

The start-up archives are saved to diskette.
The exact operating sequence is specified in the following publication:
References: /BEM/, Operator’s Guide HMI Embedded or
/BAD/, Operator’s Guide HMI Advanced

Note
When you create an archive, you can save the NC and PLC separately or to-
gether.
When reading in the archive files, the NC archive must be read in first, followed
by an NCK reset and, if necessary, a PLC initial clear. Then the PLC archive is
read in. Note that all the data of the NC or PLC are deleted and replaced with
those in the archive.

4.4 Upgrade

You will find information about upgrading ShopMill in file update_x.txt.

J

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 4-39
4 Installation and Start-Up 11.03
4.4 Upgrade

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

4-40 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
PLC Program 5
5.1 Structure of the PLC program
In OBs 1, 40, and 100 the ShopMill-PLC program, the tool management, and
the PLC basic program (FB 1, FC 2, ...) must be called up as shown in Fig. 5-1.

ÎÎÎ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
"# &%%

ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÎÎÎ

'
&%%
6  

ÇÇÇÇÇ '# &

ÇÇÇÇÇ


ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
"# &


 

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
'
! +# *
 
  

ÎÎÎÎ
ÇÇÇÇÇ


 


ÇÇÇÇÇ
'
($
   -. * '
!$

ÇÇÇÇÇ
7   

*
"
%(!

ÇÇÇÇÇ


   & 5
'
&3
4

ÇÇÇÇÇ

S Call FC 19/24 

ÇÇÇÇÇ
S Parameter assignment for the '
3%

ÇÇÇÇÇ
ShopMill interface DB 82 (FC 90)
  *  
* +# ,! 8

ÇÇÇÇÇ
'
(% +# ,& 9



)

ÇÇÇÇÇ
 


* +# ,!

ÇÇÇÇÇ
  
+# ,(/,0 *

ÇÇÇÇÇ
+ -. * '
(1
 



ÇÇÇÇÇ
 




ÇÇÇÇÇ
'
(&/((
'
3
 


ÇÇÇÇÇ
2#

'# $

ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
'# &&%4 +# &&%

) 5

ÇÇÇÇÇ
6  

ÇÇÇÇÇ

   !

ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
"# $% '
(
 

ÇÇÇÇÇ

  

 -

ÇÇÇÇÇ

 

Fig. 5-1 Structure of the PLC program

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 5-41
5 PLC Program 11.03
5.2 Overview of blocks

5.2 Overview of blocks

The blocks used by ShopMill are listed below. These blocks must not be
changed and must be used. A precise description of the blocks is given in the
following sections.

Table 5-1 ShopMill blocks

Block Comment
FC 30 ShopMill PLC program
Block called in OB 1.
FC 31–33 ShopMill PLC program
Blocks only loaded.
FC 34 Diagnostics for monitoring the standard interface signals that
are written by the ShopMill PLC program. Block can be
called in OB 1 for diagnostic purposes.
FC 35 ShopMill PLC program
Block only loaded.
FB 20 HiGraphErrEmitterFB block for errors and timeout. Block is
only loaded.
DB 81 HMI interface
DB 82 ShopMill interface
DB 83–87 Data blocks for ShopMill PLC program

ShopMill also includes several source files for blocks as examples. You can
adapt and compile these source files.
As an alternative, you can also use your own blocks.

Table 5-2 Example sources

Source Block Comment

GPOB810D.AWL OB 1, Example blocks for the OB
GPOB840D.AWL OB 40,
OB 100
FC90_MSTT19.AWL FC 90 Example block for supplying ShopMill interface
FC90_OP032S.AWL DB 82
Block can be called with OB 1.
TM_W_GR.AWL FC 100, Example module for configuration of the tool man-
TM_WO_GR.AWL agement. Block is called in OB 100.
FB 110, Example module for data transfer of the tool man-
agement. Block is called in OB 1.
DB 110 Instance data block for FB 110

A precise description of the example blocks is given in the following sections.

The example blocks for tool management are described in Chapter 9 “Tool Man-
agement”.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

5-42 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 5 PLC Program
5.3 ShopMill PLC program

5.3 ShopMill PLC program

The ShopMill-PLC program includes the following blocks:

FC 30...35 The function blocks FC 30–35 control the machine control panel functionality in
DB 82 and the HMI functionality in DB 81.
You must not change the numbers of function blocks FC 30–35. This means
you must change the blocks already assigned these numbers by the PLC user
program.
ShopMill is much more than just an operator interface consisting of screen
forms and images. It also offers a complete operator system providing the user
with the necessary functions for each control state. For example, the ShopMill
operation mode “Manual” is not identical to the NCK operating mode “JOG”.
For example, to execute the functions “Zero point Workpiece”, “Measure tool”,
“Positioning”, etc. in “Manual”, ShopMill automatically switches at NC Start to
NC operating mode “Automatic” and back again to “JOG” mode at the end of
the function or at NC Stop. This makes the manual functions independent of the
control operating modes of the NC from the operator’s point of view.
This functionality, which is continued in the ShopMill “Automatic” mode, is imple-
mented in the PCU (ShopMill user interface) and in the PLC (ShopMill PLC pro-
gram FC 30).

FB 20 The FB 20 function block collects output alarms from the ShopMill blocks FC
30–33 and display them.
Function block FB 20 is only loaded. It must be available in the automation sys-
tem (AS) during operation. A block call is not required.

DB 81...87 Data blocks DB 81 and DB 82 form the HMI or ShopMill interface. Data blocks
83–87 supply values to the ShopMill-PLC program.
The numbers of data blocks DB 81–87 must not be changed. This means that
the blocks with these numbers already allocated by the PLC user program must
be changed.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 5-43
5 PLC Program 11.03
5.4 ShopMill interface DB 82

5.4 ShopMill interface DB 82

The ShopMill PLC program also requires an interface to the PLC program in
addition to the internal interface to the user interface or to the NC interface. This
is provided in the ShopMill interface DB 82.
The machine control panel’s signals (ShopMill operating modes Reset, Start,
Stop, Spindle clockwise/counterclockwise/off, etc.) must be input into this inter-
face by PLC user program part 1. The ShopMill PLC program then carries out
the relevant actions and returns the current status to DB 82. This can then be
assessed by PLC user program part 2.
Please refer to Chapter 6 “Signal Description” for a detailed description of all the
signals of ShopMill interface DB 82.

Overview for active The figure below shows the connections for the active ShopMill PLC program.
ShopMill PLC


2 

MCP

Base Outputs Inputs

signals
MPI bus

Inputs
IB 0...7
HMI Outputs PLC user program
interface DB 81 QB 0...7

Outputs
Inputs
Data (indicators,
(keys,
transfer etc.)
switches)

ShopMill DB 82 ShopMill interface

PLC FC 30
program Active

Standard interface signals

DB 10 DB 11 DB 21

NC Mode group Channel

Fig. 5-2 ShopMill operation

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

5-44 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 5 PLC Program
5.4 ShopMill interface DB 82

A list of the standard interface signals that are affected by ShopMill PLC pro-
gram FC 30 is given in Section 5.5 “Standard interface signals for/from Shop-
Mill”.

Note
When the ShopMill user interface is active, the ShopMill PLC program is also
activated. This is displayed by the output signal DB 82 DBX36.0 “cmm_plc_ac-
tiv”=1. The ShopMill interface DB 82 must be assigned parameters by the PLC
user program. Data transfer of the base signals from IB0...7/QB0...7 is set via
the DB 82 DBB0 signal “transfer_base_sig”. The default interface signals allo-
cated by the ShopMill PLC program must not be overwritten by the user.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 5-45
5 PLC Program 11.03
5.5 Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill

5.5 Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill

Here is a list of the standard interface signals that are influenced by the Shop-
Mill-PLC program FC 30 (DB 11 and DB 21) or the ShopMill user interface
(DB 19).
Table 5-3 Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill

Byte Designation
DB 11 Signals to mode group (PLC–––>NCK)
DBB0 Bit0 AUTOMATIC mode
Bit1 MDA mode
Bit2 JOG mode
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1
DBB1 Bit0 Machine function TEACH IN
Bit1 Machine function REPOS
Bit2 Machine function REF
See /FB1/, Description of Functions Basic Machine, K1
DB 19 Signals from operator panel (HMI–––>PLC)
DBX18 Bit0 Update tool data
See Section 6.1 “HMI interface DB19”
DBX20 Bit6 Simulation active
See Section 6.1 “HMI interface DB19”
DB 21 Signals to NCK channel (PLC–––>NCK)
DBB0 Bit3 Activate DRF
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Expansion Functions,
H1
DBB0 Bit5 Activate M01
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1
DBB0 Bit6 Activate dry run feedrate
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, V1
DBB1 Bit7 Activate program testing
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1
DBB2 Bit0 Skip block
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1
DBB6 Bit2 Delete distance to go
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, A2
DBB7 Bit1 Cycle Start
Bit3 Cycle Stop
Bit7 Reset
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1
DB3X (X = 4 to 6) Signals to spindle (PLC–––>NCK)
DBB30 Bit0 Spindle Stop
Bit1 Spindle Start CW rotation
Bit2 Spindle Start CCW rotation
DB3X (X = 4 to 6) Signals from spindle (NCK–––>PLC)
DBW86 M function for spindle
See /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, S1

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

5-46 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 5 PLC Program
5.5 Standard interface signals for/from ShopMill

Note

S If a mode group reset is used by the PLC user program, it must be ensured
that DB 82 DBX4.0, “base_sig.reset” is set simultaneously in the PLC user
program.

S If feed disable for a stationary spindle (DB3X.DBX61.4) has been imple-

mented in the PLC user program it must not be activated with “rigid tapping”
(DB3X.DBX84.3), because with “hole circle thread cutting with positioning
to circle” the axes are positioned with feedrate.

Sample application The “Simulation active” signal is set in ShopMill as well as on the CNC ISO op-
“Simulation erator interface. This signal can be used, for example, in the user PLC to sup-
active” press inhibition of operating mode changes to allow the simulation routine to run
under ShopMill. (An operating mode changeover takes place in the ShopMill
PLC when the simulation run starts.)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 5-47
5 PLC Program 11.03
5.6 OB 1 and OB 100

5.6 OB 1 and OB 100

The structure of the PLC program is defined by organization blocks OB 1 and

OB 100.
OB 1 and OB 100 must contain the calls for the PLC basic program, the ma-
chine control panel, the ShopMill PLC program, and the tool management as
well as initialization of the ShopMill interface.
You can implement these calls yourself or use the source files GPOB810D.AWL
and GPOB840D.AWL from the ShopMill PLC library as an example. You must
adapt and compile the source files.
The examples for OB 1 and OB 100 are illustrated below. The calls for the
ShopMill PLC program and tool management are marked in bold type. You must
not change the sequence in which the blocks in the example are called.

Example of OB 1 ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 1
VERSION: 5.2
VAR_TEMP
OB1_EV_CLASS: BYTE;
OB1_SCAN_1: BYTE;
OB1_PRIORITY: BYTE;
OB1_OB_NUMBR: BYTE;
OB1_RESERVED_1: BYTE;
OB1_RESERVED_2: BYTE;
OB1_PREV_CYCLE: INT;
OB1_MIN_CYCLE: INT;
OB1_MAX_CYCLE: INT;
OB1_DATE_TIME: DATE_AND_TIME;
//Data for ShopMill
START_UP: BOOL;
// INSERT USER LOCAL DATA HERE
// Insert user data from here
END_VAR
BEGIN

// Basic program
CALL FC2;
//
// INSERT USER PROGRAM PART 1 HERE
// Insert user program part 1 from here
//
//First cycle of OB 1 store into “START_UP”
L #OB1_SCAN_1;
L 1;
==I;
= #START_UP;
//
//Machine control panel/Operator panel
L DB82.DBB0;
L 0;
==I ;

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

5-48 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 5 PLC Program
5.6 OB 1 and OB 100

SPB MOD0;
//small operator panel
L DB82.DBB0;
L 1;
==I ;
SPB MOD1;
//standard operator panel 19’’
SPA FC90;
//no operator panel selected
//
MOD0: CALL FC 24(
ModeGroupNo :=B#16#1,
ChanNo :=B#16#1,
SpindleIFNo :=B#16#5,
FeedHold :=M100.0,
SpindleHold :=M100.1,
SpindleDir :=M100.2);
SPA FC 90;
//
MOD1: CALL F C19(
ModeGroupNo :=B#16#1,
ChanNo :=B#16#1,
SpindleIFNo :=B#16#5,
FeedHold :=M100.0,
SpindleHold :=M100.1);
//
FC90: CALL FC 90(
SpindleIFNo :=B#16#5);
//

//
// ShopMill PLC program
CALL FC 30(INIT_SD:= #START_UP);
//Initialize ShopMill PLC program

//Tool Management System

CALL FB 110, DB 110;

//INSERT USER PROGRAM PART 2 HERE

//Insert user program part 2 from here

END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 5-49
5 PLC Program 11.03
5.6 OB 1 and OB 100

OB 100 example ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100

VERSION: 5.2
VAR_TEMP
OB100_EV_CLASS: BYTE;
OB100_STRTUP: BYTE;
OB100_PRIORITY: BYTE;
OB100_OB_NUMBR: BYTE;
OB100_RESERVED_1: BYTE;
OB100_RESERVED_2: BYTE;
OB100_STOP: WORD;
OB100_RESERVED_3: WORD;
OB100_RESERVED_4: WORD;
OB100_DATE_TIME: DATE_AND_TIME;
END_VAR

BEGIN
//Tool Management System
CALL FC 100( RealMagLoc :=30);
//Number of locations in real magazine
//
//Basic program
CALL FB 1 , DB 7(
MCPNum :=1,
MCP1In :=P#E0.0,
MCP1Out :=P#A0.0,
MCP1StatSend :=P#A8.0
MCP1StatRec :=P#A12.0,
MCP1BusAdr :=14,
MCP1Timeout :=S5T#700MS,
MCP1Cycl :=S5T#200MS,
MCPMPI :=TRUE,
NCCyclTimeout :=S5T#200MS,
NCRunupTimeout :=S5T#50S);

// INSERT USER PROGRAM HERE

//Insert user program from here

END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK

Note
The OB 100 example applies to the SINUMERIK 810D. On the SINUMERIK
840D/840Di, the value of MCP1BusAdr:=6 and MCPMPI:=FALSE.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

5-50 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 5 PLC Program
5.7 Machine control panel

5.7 Machine control panel

The signals from the machine control panel must be passed onto the ShopMill
interface DB 82.
You initialize at least the following signals in DB 82:

S DB 82 DBB0 (transmission mode for MCP signals)

S DB 82 DBB8 (assignment: Spindle axis data block)
Either use your own blocks or adapt the examples to block FC 90.

Example FC 90 The following sample source files are available in the ShopMill library for param-
eter assignment to ShopMill interface DB 82:

S FC90_MSTT19.AWL (key assignment for MCP19”)

S FC90_OP32S.AWL (key assignment for MCP of the OP032S)
Compiling one of the above STL sources generates block FC 90, which auto-
matically assigns values to the two above signals of the DB 82.
In fixed transfer mode (DB82 DBB0), the ShopMill-PLC transfers signals from
the input/output range of the machine control panel to the ShopMill interface
DB82 (DBX2.0, DBX2.1, DBX4.0, DBX4.1, DBX4.2, DBX6.7, DBX30.0,
DBX30.1, DBX32.1, DBX32.2, DBX34.7).
FC 90 must be called in OB 1 in Part 1 of the PLC user program.
The keys are assigned as follows in the examples:
Keys assigned by ShopMill via the DB 82 are grayed out.
Symbols are available in the keyboard cover set for keys
to .

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 5-51
5 PLC Program 11.03
5.7 Machine control panel

Machine control
panel 19’’

 X Y Z

[.] 1  4 5 6

 10 100  7 8 9 % %
 1000 10000

  10 – +

11 12 13

Fig. 5-3 Key assignment for 19” machine control panel

Jog mode MANUAL

 Operating mode MDA
 AUTO operating mode
 Tool Offset – Tool operating area
 Program Manager – Directory operating area
 Alarm – Alarms operating area

Program – Program operating area
 Spindle rotation counterclockwise (M4) and Spindle Start
 Spindle Stop (M5)
 Spindle rotation clockwise (M3) and Spindle Start
11 Reset
12 Cycle Stop
13 Cycle Start

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

5-52 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 5 PLC Program
5.7 Machine control panel

Machine control
panel OP032S

2 8 9 10

11

12 13

Fig. 5-4 Key assignment machine control panel for OP032S

Jog mode MANUAL

 Operating mode MDA
 AUTO operating mode
 Spindle rotation counterclockwise (M4) and Spindle Start
 Spindle Stop (M5)
 Spindle rotation clockwise (M3) and Spindle Start
11 Reset
12 Cycle Stop
13 Cycle Start

Note
The operating areas for tool, directory, alarms and program can be selected via
hard keys on the CNC keyboard for OP032S.

Interlocking logic The interlocking/security logic in the PLC user program for the signals DB 82
for MCP signals DBX4.1, “base_sig.nc_cycle_start” and DB 82 DBX9.1, “spindle_start” must not
be implemented directly in the NCK interface but must act on the associated
input signals in IB0...7 of the MCP.
In addition, the DB 21 DBX7.0 signal “NC start disable” can be activated for an
invalid start.
The interlocking signals must be in the PLC user program Part 1 before
FC 19/FC 24.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 5-53
5 PLC Program 11.03
5.8 Diagnostics function for start-up purposes

5.8 Diagnostics function for start-up purposes

Description If you want to monitor the standard interface signals influenced by the ShopMill-
PLC program during start-up (see Section 5.5 “Standard interface signals for/
from ShopMill”), use the diagnostics block FC 34.
The default interface signals must not be changed by the ShopMill PLC pro-
gram. If changes occur in the signals, the diagnostics block indicates this error
in its circular buffer for error messages (20 entries possible). If a signal is cycli-
cally changed, a new entry is conducted in the error message buffer in each
PLC cycle. This function is activated via the data block DB82 DBX60.0.

Example Initialize diagnostics function:

DBX60.0 = 1 (monitor_on)
DBX60.1 = 1 (monitor_initialize)
Activate diagnostics function
DBX60.0 = 1 (monitor_on)
DBX60.1 = 0 (monitor_initialize)
Feedback from diagnostics function:
Error message 1 (e.g. for DB11DBX0.1)
DBW62 current_number # 0 (error event counter) . . . . . . . 1
DBB64 db_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DBB65 byte_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
DBB66 bit_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Error message 2 (e.g. for DB21DBX7.1)
DBW68 current_number # 0 (error event counter) . . . . . . . 2
DBB70 db_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DBB71 byte_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DBB72 bit_number (decimal output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
etc. ...

Call The function block in OB 1 must be called in the following sequence:

FC 2 Basic program block
FC 34 Diagnostics block
PLC user program Part 1
(interlocking logic, FC 19/24 machine control panel block)
FC 30 ShopMill PLC program
FB 110 Data transfer block for ShopMill tool management
in standard mode
PLC user program part 2

Note
The tool box (PLC library) contains the example VAT82 for the variable table.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

5-54 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Signal Description 6
6.1 HMI interface DB19

DB19 get_tool_data
DBX18.0 Update tool data
Data block Signal(s) to ShopTurn
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Signal meaning 1: The tool data are updated.
When this process is finished, the signal is reset again by the ShopTurn user interface.

DB19 E_SimActiv
DBX20.6 Simulation active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal meaning 0: Quitting simulation
1: Entering simulation
Application: Can be evaluated by the machine manufacturer to activate the test simulta-
neously with NC start. The drive machine data 1012, bit 2 must be 0. The state “ext. pulse
disable active, terminal 663 open” is not passed to the NC.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-55
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.2 Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

6.2 Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

6.2.1 Signals to ShopMill (input signals)

Table 6-1 Signals to ShopMill (input signals)

Address Name Initial Comment

value
0 CMM_IN.transfer_base_sig B#16#0 Transmission mode for MCP signals
2.0 CMM_IN.base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual FALSE ShopMill Manual operating mode
2.1 CMM_IN.base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic FALSE ShopMill Automatic operating mode
4.0 CMM_IN.base_sig.reset FALSE RESET for ShopMill
4.1 CMM_IN.base_sig.nc_cycle_start FALSE Cycle Start
4.2 CMM_IN.base_sig.nc_cycle_stop FALSE Cycle Stop
6.0 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.tool FALSE Tool operating area
6.1 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.directory FALSE Directory operating area
6.2 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.messages FALSE Alarms/messages operating area
6.3 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.program FALSE Program operating area
6.4 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.oem1 FALSE OEM1 operating area
6.5 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.oem2 FALSE OEM2 operating area
6.6 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.customer FALSE CUSTOMER operating area
6.7 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.mda FALSE MDA operating area
8 CMM_IN.spindle_interface_number B#16#5 Assignment of spindle/axis data record
9.0 CMM_IN.user_defined_spindle_control FALSE User-defined spindle control
9.1 CMM_IN.spindle_start FALSE Spindle Start
9.2 CMM_IN.spindle_stop FALSE Spindle Stop
9.3 CMM_IN.spindle_left FALSE Spindle rotation counterclockwise
9.4 CMM_IN.spindle_right FALSE Spindle rotation clockwise
9.5 CMM_IN.program_extern_selected FALSE Program is selected in the PLC
9.6 CMM_IN.disable_cnc_standard FALSE Disable switchover to CNC ISO operator interface
9.7 CMM_IN.cmm_activ_in_cnc_mode TRUE ShopMill PLC active during CNC ISO operation
10.0 CMM_IN.program_test_request FALSE Select Program test function
10.1 CMM_IN.dry_run_request FALSE Select DryRun function
10.2 CMM_IN.m01_request FALSE Select M01 function
10.3 CMM_IN.skip_block_request FALSE Select Skip Block function
10.4 CMM_IN.boot_standard FALSE System boot on CNC ISO operator interface
10.5 CMM_IN.nck_auto_req FALSE Preparation of PLC block search
10.6 CMM_IN.spindle_act_m30_reset FALSE Spindle active after M30 and reset
10.7 CMM_IN.ignore_nck_alarm FALSE Ignore NCK alarm on cycle start
11.1 CMM_IN.get_tool_data FALSE Update tool data
11.2 CMM_IN.c_axis_feed_drive FALSE This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill
11.3 CMM_IN.select_spindle_readout_0 FALSE This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill
11.4 CMM_IN.select_spindle_readout_1 FALSE This signal is not evaluated by ShopMill

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-56 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.2 Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

Table 6-1 Signals to ShopMill (input signals)

Address Name Initial Comment

value
11.5 CMM_IN.drf_request FALSE Select DRF function
12 CMM_IN.ext_m_cmd_1 100 1st extended M function for output of tool-specific
functions
13 CMM_IN.ext_m_cmd_2 101 2nd extended M function for output of tool-specific
functions

6.2.2 Signals from ShopMill (output signals)

Table 6-2 Signals from ShopMill (output signals)

Address Name Initial Comment

value
30.0 CMM_OUT.base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual FALSE ShopMill Manual operating mode
30.1 CMM_OUT.base_sig.main_mode_mill.auto- FALSE ShopMill Automatic operating mode
matic
32.0 CMM_OUT.base_sig.reset FALSE Reset performed
32.1 CMM_OUT.base_sig.nc_cycle_activ FALSE Cycle active
32.2 CMM_OUT.base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped FALSE Cycle interrupted
34.0 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.tool FALSE Tool operating area activated
34.1 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.directory FALSE Directory operating area activated
34.2 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.messages FALSE Alarms/messages operating area activated
34.3 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.program FALSE Program operating area activated
34.4 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.oem1 FALSE OEM1 operating area selected
34.5 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.oem2 FALSE OEM2 operating area selected
34.6 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.customer FALSE CUSTOMER operating area selected
34.7 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.mda FALSE MDA operating area selected
36.0 CMM_OUT.cmm_plc_activ FALSE ShopMill PLC active
36.1 CMM_OUT.cmm_mmc_active FALSE ShopMill user interface active
36.2 CMM_OUT.spindle_start_req FALSE Spindle start requested (M3/M4 output to spindle)
36.3 CMM_OUT.spindle_stop_req FALSE Spindle stop requested, M5 output to spindle
36.4 CMM_OUT.spindle_right FALSE Spindle rotation clockwise preselected
36.5 CMM_OUT.spindle_left FALSE Spindle rotation counterclockwise preselected
36.7 CMM_OUT.ext_prog_sel FALSE External program selected for execution
37.0 CMM_OUT.program_selection_done FALSE HMI acknowledgment that a program has been
selected
37.1 CMM_OUT.program_test_activ FALSE Program test function is active
37.2 CMM_OUT.dry_run_activ FALSE DryRun function is active
37.3 CMM_OUT.m01_activ FALSE M01 function is active
37.4 CMM_OUT.skip_block_activ FALSE Skip Block function is active
37.7 CMM_OUT.start_up_activ FALSE ShopMill runup active

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-57
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.2 Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

Table 6-2 Signals from ShopMill (output signals)

Address Name Initial Comment

value
38.1 CMM_OUT.tool_un_load_internal FALSE Load/unload tool without magazine loading
38.2 CMM_OUT.drf_activ FALSE DRF function is active
38.3 CMM_OUT.nc_start_ineffective FALSE NC start not effective
42.0 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_on FALSE Tool-specific function 1 active
42.1 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_on FALSE Tool-specific function 2 active
42.2 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_on FALSE Tool-specific function 3 active
42.3 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_on FALSE Tool-specific function 4 active
42.4 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_activ FALSE Tool-specific function 1 valid
42.5 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_activ FALSE Tool-specific function 2 valid
42.6 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_activ FALSE Tool-specific function 3 valid
42.7 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_activ FALSE Tool-specific function 4 valid
44 CMM_OUT.mask_number W#16#0 Current screen number of ShopMill

6.2.3 Diagnostics buffer signals

Table 6-3 Diagnostics buffer signals

Address Name Initial Comment

value
60.0 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_on FALSE Activate diagnostics function
(input signal)
60.1 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_initialize FALSE Initialize diagnostics function
(input signal)
62 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].cur- W#16#0 Current number of error message 1
rent_number (output signal)
64 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].db_num- B#16#0 DB number of error message 1
ber (output signal)
65 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1]. B#16#0 Byte number of error message 1
byte_number (output signal)
66 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].bit_num- B#16#0 Bit number of error message 1
ber (output signal)
68 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].cur- W#16#0 Current number of error message 2
rent_number (output signal)
70 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].db_num- B#16#0 DB number of error message 2
ber (output signal)
71 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2]. B#16#0 Byte number of error message 2
byte_number (output signal)
72 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].bit_num- B#16#0 Bit number of error message 2
ber (output signal)
. .
. .
. .
176 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].cur- W#16#0 Current number of error message 20
rent_number (output signal)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-58 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.2 Overview of ShopMill interface DB82

Table 6-3 Diagnostics buffer signals

Address Name Initial Comment

value
178 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20]. B#16#0 DB number of error message 20
db_number (output signal)
179 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20]. B#16#0 Byte number of error message 20
byte_number (output signal)
180 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20]. B#16#0 Bit number of error message 20
bit_number (output signal)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-59
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

6.3.1 Signals to ShopMill (input signals)

DB82 transfer_base_sig
DBB0 Transmission mode for MCP signals
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal specifies whether the base signals with the structure “base_sig” are to be used
from the I/O area of machine control panel OP032S or from the 19” machine control panel,
i.e. the ShopMill PLC automatically copies these I/O signals to DB82.

Value:
0 Standard assignment; connection of machine control panel OP032S
1 Connection of machine control panel 19’’
y2 Base signals are not transferred; base signals must be transferred by
the operator!

Note See Section 5.7 “Machine control panel”, subsection on interlocking logic for MCP signals

DB82 base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual
DBX2.0 ShopMill Manual operating mode
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning Manual operating mode (“Machine manual”) is selected in ShopMill with this signal.
Corresponding to... DB82.DBB0
Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set
References /BAS/, ShopMill Operator’s Guide

DB82 base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic
DBX2.1 ShopMill Automatic operating mode
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning Automatic operating mode (“Machine auto”) is selected in ShopMill with this signal.
Corresponding to... DB82.DBB0
Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set
References /BAS/, ShopMill Operator’s Guide

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-60 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 base_sig.reset
DBX4.0 Reset
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning Setting this signal triggers a channel-specific reset and the ShopMill PLC is reset. The ac-
tive program is aborted.
Timing diagram

CMM_IN.
reset

CMM_OUT.
reset At least one PLC cycle set
Corresponding to ... DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.0, base_sig.reset
Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set
S If mode group reset is used by the PLC user program, you must ensure that the
CMM_IN.base_sig.reset signal is set at the same time.
S If NC cannot perform a reset, e.g. emergency stop state is active, there is no acknowl-
edgment for the “CMM_OUT.base_sig.reset” signal. In this case, the channel-specific
reset is present at the NC interface for at least 2 sec.

DB82 base_sig.nc_cycle_start
DBX4.1 Cycle Start
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change S ShopMill Automatic operating mode
0 –––> 1 –––> 0 Start of the selected part program
Note: The ShopMill Automatic operating mode is not identical with NC Automatic mode.
Switching from NC JOG to NC Auto only after Start and internal checking by the ShopMill
state management.
S ShopMill Manual operating mode
According to selected operator function:
– Start of function in the screen form T, S, M, ...
– Start of manual “Measure tool” with probe
– Start of manual “Zero point workpiece” with probe
– Start “Positioning”
– Start of “Face milling”
Corresponding to ... DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.1, base_sig.nc_cycle_activ
Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set

DB82 base_sig.nc_cycle_stop
DBX4.2 Cycle Stop
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change Interruption of active program
0 –––> 1
Corresponding to ... DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.2, base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped
Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-61
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 sub_mode_mill.tool
DBX6.0 Tool operating area
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change 0 –––> 1 This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
19” machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an
OP032S machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill
when you select this key.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.0, sub_mode_mill.tool

DB82 sub_mode_mill.directory
DBX6.1 Directory operating area
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change 0 –––> 1 This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
19” machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an
OP032S machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill
when you select this key.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.1, sub_mode_mill.directory

DB82 sub_mode_mill.messages
DBX6.2 Alarms/messages operating area
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change 0 –––> 1 This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
19” machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an
OP032S machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill
when you select this key.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.2, sub_mode_mill.messages

DB82 sub_mode_mill.program
DBX6.3 Program operating area
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change 0 –––> 1 This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
19” machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an
OP032S machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill
when you select this key.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.3, sub_mode_mill.program

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-62 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 sub_mode_mill.oem1
DBX6.4 OEM1 operating area
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Edge change 0 –––> 1 This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
19” machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an
OP032S machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill
when you select this key.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.4, sub_mode_mill.oem1

DB82 sub_mode_mill.oem2
DBX6.5 OEM2 operating area
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Edge change 0 –––> 1 This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
19” machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an
OP032S machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill
when you select this key.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.5, sub_mode_mill.oem2

DB82 sub_mode_mill.customer
DBX6.6 CUSTOMER operating area
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Edge change 0 –––> 1 This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
19” machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an
OP032S machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill
when you select this key.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.6, sub_mode_mill.customer

DB82 sub_mode_mill.mda
DBX6.7 MDA operating area
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Edge change 0 –––> 1 This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
19” machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an
OP032S machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in ShopMill
when you select this key.
Signal state 0 No effect
Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.7, sub_mode_mill.mda

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-63
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 spindle_interface_number
DBB8 Assignment of spindle/axis data record
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal can be used to assign the spindle to an axis data record. Enter the number of
the machine axis.
Corresponding to... ShopMill SW release 5.3 and higher: MD 9705 CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE, enter the number
of the channel axis here.

DB82 user_defined_spindle_control
DBX9.0 User-defined spindle control
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.2
Signal state 0 The spindle control is supported by the ShopMill PLC. Interface signals DB82.DBX9.1 to
DB82.DBX9.4 and DB82.DBX36.2 to DB82.DBX36.5 are active.
Interface signals DB3x.DBX30.0 to DB3x.DBX30.2 are written to the axis DB of the spindle
(see also Section 11.3 “Spindle control”).
Signal state 1 The spindle control is not supported by the ShopMill PLC. Interface signals DB82.DBX9.1
to DB82.DBX9.4 and DB82.DBX36.2 to DB82.DBX36.5 have no function and interface
signals DB3x.DBX30.0 to DB3x.DBX30.2 are not written. The spindle must be controlled in
the user PLC.

DB82 spindle_start
DBX9.1 Spindle Start
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change The spindle starts only when a direction of rotation is selected via interface signals
0 –––> 1 DB3x.DBX30.1 or DB3x.DBX30.2.
Please refer to Section 11.3 “Spindle control”.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX36.2, spindle_start_req
DB82, DBX9.3, spindle_left
DB82, DBX9.4, spindle_right

DB82 spindle_stop
DBX9.2 Spindle Stop
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change The spindle is stopped via interface signal DB3x.DBX30.0.
0 –––> 1 Please refer to Section 11.3 “Spindle control”.
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX36.3, spindle_stop_req

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-64 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 spindle_left
DBX9.3 Spindle rotation counterclockwise
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change Direction of spindle rotation (CCW) works only in conjunction with Spindle Start.
0 –––> 1
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX36.5, spindle_left
References /BAS/, ShopMill Operator’s Guide

DB82 spindle_right
DBX9.4 Spindle rotation clockwise
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Edge change Direction of spindle rotation (CW) works only in conjunction with spindle start.
0 –––> 1 –––> 0
Signal state 0 No effect
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX36.4, spindle_right
References /BAS/, ShopMill Operator’s Guide

DB82 program_extern_selected
DBX9.5 Program is selected in the PLC
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning When the signal is set, it is possible to select a part program externally from the PLC.
Timing diagram

DB82, DBX9.5
Program_extern_selected

ShopMill loads the pro-

gram

DB82, DBX37.0
Program_selection_done

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX37.0, program_selection_done

References /BAS/, ShopMill Operator’s Guide

DB82 disable_cnc_standard
DBX9.6 Disable switchover to CNC ISO operator interface
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning When the signal is set, switchover from ShopMill to the CNC ISO operator interface can be
disabled.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-65
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 cmm_active_in_cnc_mode
DBX9.7 ShopMill PLC active during CNC ISO operation
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning Value:
0: ShopMill PLC not active during CNC ISO operation.
This setting must not be used for ShopMill Open.
1: ShopMill PLC active during CNC ISO operation.
This setting must always be used for ShopMill Open.
Application example(s) Switchover between CNC ISO and ShopMill operation is possible at any time (even when a
program is active and running).

DB82 program_test_request
DBX10.0 Select Program test function
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Edge change This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
0 –––> 1 machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the program test function.

DB82 dry_run_request
DBX10.1 Select DryRun function
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Edge change This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
0 –––> 1 machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the DryRun function.

DB82 m01_request
DBX10.2 Select M01 function
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Edge change This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
0 –––> 1 machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the M01 function.

DB82 skip_block_request
DBX10.3 Select Skip Block function
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Edge change This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
0 –––> 1 machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the Skip Block function.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-66 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 boot_standard
DBX10.4 System boot on CNC ISO operator interface
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning Setting this signal forces the system to boot on the CNC ISO operator interface. If the sig-
nal is reset again, it is possible to switch over to the ShopMill operator interface.

DB82 nck_auto_req
DBX10.5 Preparation of PLC block search
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Edge change Switchover on the NCK from JOG to AUTO can be requested with this signal.
0 –––> 1
Signal state 0 No effect
Application example(s) Block search via PLC
Corresponding to ... DB19, DBX6.0, signals from mode group (NCK ––> PLC) active AUTOMATIC mode

DB82 spindle_act_m30_reset
DBX10.6 Spindle active after M30 and reset
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Edge change The spindle is not switched off at program end and on reset. The spindle must be switched
0 –––> 1 off in the user PLC.
Signal state 0 The spindle is switched off at program end and on reset by the ShopMill PLC.

DB82 ignore_nck_alarm
DBX10.7 Ignore NCK alarm on cycle start
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal meaning With an active NCK alarm (DB10.DBX109.0 = 1), e.g. battery alarm, the following applies:
0: Cycle Start not possible
1: Cycle Start possible

Alarms
– EMERGENCY STOP (DB10.DBX106.1 = 1)
– NCK alarm with machining stop (DB21.DBX36.7 = 1)
cannot be suppressed by this interface signal, i.e. Cycle Start is not possible in these
cases.

DB82 get_tool_data
DBX11.1 Update tool data
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal state 1 or edge The tool data are updated. When this process is finished, the signal is reset again by the
change 0 –––> 1 ShopMill PLC.
Signal state 0 or –
edge change 1 ––> 0
Note Use interface signal DB19 DBX18.0 instead of DB82 DBX11.1 as from ShopMill 6.3.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-67
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 drf_request
DBX11.5 Select DRF function
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Edge change This signal can also be implemented in the PLC user program via a customized key on the
0 –––> 1 machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the DRF function.

DB82 ext_m_cmd_1
DBB12 1st extended M function for output of tool-specific functions
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal state 1 or edge ShopMill utilizes 2 extended M functions to output tool-specific functions. The number of the
change 0 –––> 1 1st extended M function is entered in this interface signal. At the same time, display ma-
chine data 9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1 must be set to this value. The de-
fault setting is 100, the maximum value 255.
Signal state 0 or –
edge change 1 –––> 0
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBB13, ext_m_cmd_2,
Display machine data 9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1

DB82 ext_m_cmd_2
DBB13 2nd extended M function for output of tool-specific functions
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal state 1 or edge ShopMill utilizes 2 extended M functions to output tool-specific functions. The number of the
change 0 –––> 1 2nd extended M function is entered in this interface signal. At the same time, display ma-
chine data 9685 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2 must be set to this value. The de-
fault setting is 101, the maximum value 255.
Signal state 0 or –
edge change 1 –––> 0
Corresponding to ... DB82, DBB13, ext_m_cmd_1,
Display machine data 9685 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-68 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

6.3.2 Signals from ShopMill (output signals)

DB82 base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual
DBX30.0 Base signals – ShopMill Manual mode
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The base signal indicates that the “Machine manual” operating area is activated. The signal
DB82.DBX36.1 cmm_mmc_activ must also be gated.

DB82 base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic
DBX30.1 Base signals – ShopMill Automatic mode
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The base signal indicates that the “Machine auto” operating area is activated. The signal
DB82.DBX36.1 cmm_mmc_activ must also be gated.

DB82 base_sig.reset
DBX32.0 Reset activated
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that a channel-specific reset was performed.

DB82 base_sig.nc_cycle_active
DBX32.1 Cycle active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal acknowledges that a program is active.

DB82 base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped
DBX32.2 Cycle interrupted
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal acknowledges that a program has been interrupted.

DB82 sub_mode_mill.tool
DBX34.0 Tool operating area selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the Tool operating area is activated.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-69
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 sub_mode_mill.directory
DBX34.1 Directory operating area selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the Directory operating area is selected.

DB82 sub_mode_mill.messages
DBX34.2 Alarms/messages operating area selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the Alarms/messages operating area is selected.

DB82 sub_mode_mill.program
DBX34.3 Program operating area selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the Program operating area is selected.

DB82 sub_mode_mill.oem1
DBX34.4 OEM1 operating area selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal meaning This signal returns the “OEM1 operating area selected” status.

DB82 sub_mode_mill.oem2
DBX34.5 OEM2 operating area selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal meaning This signal returns the “OEM2 operating area selected” status.

DB82 sub_mode_mill.customer
DBX34.6 CUSTOMER operating area selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal meaning The signal returns the “CUSTOMER operating area selected” status.

DB82 sub_mode_mill.mda
DBX34.7 MDA operating area selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal meaning This signal returns the “MDA operating area selected” status.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-70 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 cmm_plc_active
DBX36.0 ShopMill PLC active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal state 1 or edge The ShopMill PLC program is activated.
change 0 –––> 1
Signal state 0 or edge The ShopMill PLC program is not active. The PLC user program can execute a CNC ISO
change 1 –––> 0 operation.
Special cases, errors, ...... The ShopMill PLC program is activated when the ShopMill application is loaded in the
operator interface by pressing the ShopMill softkey or when the DB82 DBX9.7 signal
“cmm_active_in_cnc_mode” is set to “1”.
After switchover to CNC ISO operation, the ShopMill PLC program cannot be set to an
inactive state unless the DB82 DBX9.7 signal “cmm_active_in_cnc_mode” is set to “0”;
otherwise, the ShopMill PLC program remains active.

DB82 cmm_mmc_active
DBX36.1 ShopMill user interface active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal state 1 or edge The ShopMill user interface is activated.
change 0 –––> 1
Signal state 0 or edge The ShopMill user interface is not active.
change 1 –––> 0
Special cases, errors, ...... The ShopMill user interface is activated when the ShopMill application is loaded to the CNC
ISO user interface via the softkey ShopMill.

DB82 spindle_start_req
DBX36.2 Spindle start requested
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that a spindle start has been requested and M3 or M4 has been
executed.

DB82 spindle_stop_req
DBX36.3 Spindle stop requested
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that a spindle stop was requested.

DB82 spindle_right
DBX36.4 Spindle rotation clockwise
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal indicates that the plus travel command is applied at the spindle
(DB3x.DBX64.7).

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-71
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 spindle_left
DBX36.5 Spindle rotation counterclockwise
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal indicates that the minus travel command is applied at the spindle
(DB3x.DBX64.6).

DB82 ext_prog_sel
DBX36.7 External program selected for execution
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Signal meaning An external program has been selected for execution. “External” refers to all programs
which are not stored in the NC main memory, including programs on the local hard disk, in
the network drive or on other external data storage media.

DB82 program_selection_done
DBX37.0 HMI acknowledgment that a program has been selected
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that a program has been preselected via the PLC (FB 4 select).
Corresponding to... DB82, DBX9.5, program_extern_selected

DB82 program_test_active
DBX37.1 Program test function is active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the program test function is active.

DB82 dry_run_active
DBX37.2 DryRun function is active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the DryRun function is active.

DB82 m01_active
DBX37.3 M01 function is active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the M01 function is active.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-72 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 skip_block_activ
DBX37.4 Skip Block function is active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the skip block function is active.

DB82 start_up_activ
DBX37.7 ShopMill runup active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.2
Signal meaning This signal indicates that the ShopMill operator interface has been selected by means of
softkey “ShopMill”. It is reset if the ShopMill operator interface is deselected again (selec-
tion of “CNC-ISO”).

DB82 tool_un_load_internal
DBX38.1 Load/unload tool without magazine loading
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.2
Signal meaning This signal is active when tool data are read in and existing tools are either deleted or new
tools created.

DB82 drf_activ
DBX38.2 DRF function is active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Signal meaning The signal indicates that the DRF function is active.

DB82 nc_start_ineffective
DBX38.3 NC start not effective
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Signal state 1 or edge NC start was not acknowledged, i.e. not enabled, by the ShopMill user interface. This sig-
change 0 –––> 1 nal is reset on the next NC start.
Signal state 0 or edge NC start was not acknowledged, i.e. not enabled, by the ShopMill user interface.
change 1 –––> 0

DB82 tool_m_function.function_1_on
DBX42.0 Tool-specific function 1 active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that tool-specific function 1 is active.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-73
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 tool_m_function.function_2_on
DBX42.1 Tool-specific function 2 active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that tool-specific function 2 is active.

DB82 tool_m_function.function_3_on
DBX42.2 Tool-specific function 3 active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that tool-specific function 3 is active.

DB82 tool_m_function.function_4_on
DBX42.3 Tool-specific function 4 active
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that tool-specific function 4 is active.

DB82 tool_m_function.function_1_activ
DBX42.4 Tool-specific function 1 valid
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that tool-specific function 1 has been activated or deac-
tivated. The signal is low active.

DB82 tool_m_function.function_2_activ
DBX42.5 Tool-specific function 2 valid
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that tool-specific function 2 has been activated or deac-
tivated. The signal is low active.

DB82 tool_m_function.function_3_activ
DBX42.6 Tool-specific function 3 valid
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that tool-specific function 3 has been activated or deac-
tivated. The signal is low active.

DB82 tool_m_function.function_4_activ
DBX42.7 Tool-specific function 4 valid
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that tool-specific function 4 has been activated or deac-
tivated. The signal is low active.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-74 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 mask_number
DBW44 Current screen number of ShopMill
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.2
Signal meaning The signal outputs the display number of the current ShopMill screen.
The following display numbers can be output:
No. ShopMill display
Machine manual operating mode:
19 Basic display
2 T,S,M...
21 Set ZO*
30 Zero point workpiece
5 Zero point workpiece – edge x
6 Zero point workpiece – edge y
7 Zero point workpiece – edge z/user screen form*
8 Zero point workpiece – corner/user screen form*
9 Zero point workpiece – drill-hole/user screen form*
10 Zero point workpiece – spigot/user screen form*
31 Zero point workpiece – user screen form*
11 Zero point workpiece – match probe – length/user screen form*
12 Zero point workpiece – match probe – diameter
32 Zero point workpiece – user screen form*
50 Measurement tool
16 Measurement tool – length manual/user screen form*
17 Measurement tool – diameter manual/user screen form*
13 Measurement tool – length auto*/user screen form*
14 Measurement tool – diameter auto*/user screen form*
51 Measurement tool – user screen form*
15 Measurement tool – match probe*/user screen form*
52 Measurement tool – user screen form*
4 Position
18 Face milling
3 Face milling – confirm with OK
1 ShopMill settings

MDA mode:
20 MDA

Machine Auto operating mode:

200 Basic display
210 Program control
220 Block search
230 User screen form*
241 Simultaneous recording – settings*
242 Simultaneous recording – top view*
243 Simultaneous recording – 3-plane view*
244 Simultaneous recording – volume model*

Program manager operating area:

300 Directory NC
310 User directory 1* 310 Part programs*
320 User directory 2* 320 Subroutines*
330 User directory 3* 330 User directory 1*
340 User directory 4* 340 User directory 2*
350 User directory 3*
360 User directory 4*

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-75
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

DB82 mask_number
DBW44 Current screen number of ShopMill
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Signal meaning Program operating area:
400 Work plan
411 Simulation – settings*
412 Simulation – top view*
413 Simulation – 3-plane view*
414 Simulation – volume model*

Messages/alarms operating area:

500 Messages
510 User screen form*
520 User screen form*

Tools/zero offsets operating area:

600 Tool list
610 Tool wear
620 User tool list*
630 Magazine
640 Zero offset
650 R parameter
660 User screen form*
680 User data

* = If display available

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-76 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 6 Signal Description
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

6.3.3 Description of diagnostics buffer signals

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_on
DBX60.0 Activate diagnostics function (input signal)
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The diagnostics function is updated

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_initialize
DBX60.1 Initialize diagnostics function (input signal)
Data block Signal(s) to ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning The ring buffer for the diagnostics function is cleared.

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].current_number
DBW n+0 Consecutive no. of error message m (output signal)
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning Consecutive no. of error message m

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].db_number
DBB n+2 DB number of error message m (output signal)
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning DB number of error message m

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].byte_number
DBB n+3 Byte number of error message m (output signal)
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning Byte number of error message m

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].bit_number
DBB n+4 Bit number of error message m (output signal)
Data block Signal(s) from ShopMill
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Signal meaning Bit number of error message m

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 6-77
6 Signal Description 11.03
6.3 Description of ShopMill interface DB82

Note Start address of ring buffer entries:

1st entry: n= 62
2nd entry: n= 68
3rd entry: n= 74
.
.
.
19th entry: n= 170
20th entry: n= 176
Number of error message:
m= 1...20
J

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

6-78 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Machine Data 7
7.1 NC machine data for ShopMill

For start-up of the NC (see Subsection 4.2.4 “Start-up NC”), there is a machine
data set cmm.8x0, containing all relevant NC machine data (also for tool man-
agement) with the values to be set. You will find the machine data record on the
software CD in directory tools\md.
You must set NC machine data with exact values as specified. You can adapt
NC machine data with minimum and variable values to the conditions of your
machine.

Note
Remember that the machine data record also contains machine data for config-
uring the memory.

The machine data for calibrating the probe (measuring cycles) can be found in
Subsection 9.1.5 “Machine data measuring cycles”.
You will find a detailed description of all NC machine data in:
References: /LIS/, Lists
/IAC/, Installation & Start-up Guide 810D
/IAD/, Installation & Start-up Guide 840D
/FB/, Function Descriptions
/HBI/, Manual 840Di

NCU load The load placed on the NCU by the position controller and the interpolator must
not exceed a maximum value of 70%. You can set the load in the NC machine
data. To do that, proceed as follows:

S Change to the CNC-ISO user interface and select menu “Diagnosis” → “Ser-
vice display” → “System resources”.

S Press softkey “Start”.

The maximum value for “NCU load by position controller and interpolator” is
reset.

S Change to the ShopMill user interface and in operating mode Automatic

select function “Simultaneous recording”.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-79
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.1 NC machine data for ShopMill

S Start the following test program:

G0 G91
LABEL:
X1
Y1
Z1
X–1
Y–1
Z–1
GOTOB LABEL
M30

S Return to the CNC-ISO user interface and select menu “Diagnosis” → “Ser-
vice display” → “System resources”.

S If the maximum value for “NCU load by position controller and interpolator” is
greater than 70%, adapt the interpolator cycle in MD 10070 $MN_IPO_SYS-
CLOCK_TIME_RATIO or the position controller cycle in MD 10050
$MN_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME. Adapting the interpolator cycle has the
advantage that axis optimization is not altered.
On the SINUMERIK 810D you can also set the ratio between the interpola-
tion and communication tasks in MD 10072 $MN_COM_IPO_TIME_RATIO.
This value should be ≤ 0.5.

S Repeat the steps described.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-80 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

Once you have completed installation of ShopMill on the PCU and start-up of
the NC and the PLC you must adapt the display machine data.
Check the settings of the display machine data marked in Table 7-1 with a “*”.

7.2.1 Overview of display machine data

Table 7-1 Display machine data for ShopMill

MD MD identifier Comment Preset

No. default
9020 $MM_TECHNOLOGY Basic configuration turning/milling 2
9021* $MM_LAYOUT_MODE Design of the user interface 0
9450 $MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT Limit value for wear, fine 0.999
9451 $MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT Limit value for fine adjustment 0.999
9460 $MM_PROGRAM_SETTINGS Settings in the Program area H8
9478* $MM_TO_OPTION_MASK Settings for ShopMill 1
9479* $MM_TO_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE Distance between individual toolholders 0
9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X Simulation of default value X 0
9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y Simulation of default value Y 0
9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA Simulation of default display area 100
9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X Simulation of maximum display X 0
9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y Simulation of maximum display Y 0
9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA Simulation of maximum display area 1000
9626 $MM_CTM_TRACE Settings in ShopMill 1
9639 $MM_CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR Upper input limit for tool wear 1
9650* $MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Position of coordinate system 0
9651* $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT Tool management concepts 4
9652* $MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL Tool monitoring 1
9653* $MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS Enabling 4th axis for user interface 0
9654 $MM_CMM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES Number of decimal places in the speed 0
input field
9655 $MM_CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST Lifting amount for deep hole drilling –1
9656 $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST Lifting amount for boring –1
9657 $MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_CONT_PO_TO_RAD Indication of variation of the smallest pos- 5
sible cutter radius in %
9658 $MM_CMM_CYC_MAX_CONT_PO_TO_RAD Indication of variation of the largest pos- 0.01
sible cutter radius
9659 $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_ANGLE Tool orientation angle on retraction –1
9660* $MM_CMM_ENABLE_PLANE_CHANGE Changing to machining plane (G17, G18, 1
G19)
9661* $MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES Number of input fields for tool-specific 0
functions
9662* $MM_CMM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS Number of gear steps 1
9663 $MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM Display radius/diameter for tool 1
9664 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN Max. feed in mm/min 10000.0
9665 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT Max. feed in mm/rev 1.0
9666 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH Max. feed in mm/tooth 1.0
9667* $MM_CMM_FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIVE Tool preselection active 1

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-81
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

MD MD identifier Comment Preset

No. default
9668* $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II M function coolant I and II –1
9669 $MM_CMM_FACE_MILL_EFF_TOOL_DIAM Effective mill diameter for face milling 85.0
9670 $MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKE Radius of approach circle for finishing cut –1.0
on contour pockets plus half the final ma-
chining allowance (–1=safety clearance)
9671 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_DEFAULT_MAG Default magazine, load tool 0
9672* $MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE Fixed location coding 0
9673* $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION Number of loading point 1
9674 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE Display of magazine list 1
9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE Customer power-up display 0
9676* $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 Path for drive names in directory manage- –
ment
9677* $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2 Path for drive names in directory manage- –
ment
9678* $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3 Path for drive names in directory manage- –
ment
9679* $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4 Path for drive names in directory manage- –
ment
9680* $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I M function coolant I 8
9681* $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II M function coolant II 7
9682 $MM_CMM_CYC_BGF_BORE_DIST Preboring depth for drill and thread milling 1
9684* $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1 1st extended M function for tool-specific 100
functions
9685* $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2 2nd extended M function for tool-specific 101
functions
9686* $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_OFF M function for coolant off 9
9687 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MOVE_DEFAULT_MAG Default magazine, move tool 0
9703* $MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_4 Axis index for 4th axis 0
9704* $MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_5 Axis index for 5th axis 0
9705* $MM_CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE Axis index for spindle 4
9718* $MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK_2 Settings for ShopMill 0
9719* $MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK Settings for ShopMill H5
9720* $MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS Enable 5th axis for user interface 0
9721* $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL Enable signal for cylinder peripheral sur- 0
face transformation
9723* $MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELING_HEAD Enable swiveling 0
9724 $MM_CMM_CIRCLE_RAPID_FEED Rapid traverse feed for positioning on cir- 5000
cular path
9749* $MM_CMM_ENABLE_MEAS_T_AUTO Enable automatic tool measurement 1
9750* $MM_CMM_MEAS_PROBE_INPUT Measuring input for a workpiece probe 0
9751* $MM_CMM_MEAS_T_PROBE_INPUT Measuring input for tool probe 1
9752 $MM_CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE Max. measuring distance for workpiece 5
measurement in the program
9753 $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN Max. measuring distance for workpiece 10
measurement in manual
9754 $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH Max. measuring distance tool length rot. 2
spindle
9755 $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS Max. measuring distance tool radius rot. 1
spindle
9756 $MM_CMM_MEASURING_FEED Measuring feed workpiece measurement 300
9757 $MM_CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL Feed in the plane with collision monitoring 1000
9758 $MM_CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL Infeed with collision monitoring 1000
9759 $MM_CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP Max. circum. veloc. tool measurement rot. 100
spindle
9760 $MM_CMM_SPIND_SPEED_ROT_SP Max. speed tool measurement rot. spindle 1000
9761 $MM_CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP Min. feedrate tool measurement rot. 10
spindle

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-82 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

MD MD identifier Comment Preset

No. default
9762 $MM_CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP Meas. precision tool measurement rot. 0.01
spindle
9763* $MM_CMM_TOOL_PROBE_TYPE Type of tool probe 0
9764* $MM_CMM_TOOL_PROBE_ALLOWS_AXIS Perm. axis directions tool probe 133
9765* $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEA Diam. tool probe 0
9766* $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS Diam. tool probe radius measurement 0
9767* $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS Dist. tool probe top edge radius measure- 0
ment
9768* $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_APPROACH_DIR Plane approach direction, tool probe –1
9769 $MM_CMM_FEED_FACTOR_1_ROT_SP Feed factor 1 tool measurement rot. sp 0
9770 $MM_CMM_FEED_FACTOR_2_ROT_SP Feed factor 2 tool measurement rot. sp 0
9771 $MM_CMM_MAX_FEED_ROT_SP Max. feedrate tool measurement rot. 20
spindle
9772 $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_MEASURING_DIST Measuring distance tool measurement 5
non-rot. spindle
9773 $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_MEASURING_FEED Feed tool measurement non-rot. spindle 300
9774 $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER Tool probe manufacturer 0
9775 $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_OFFSET Offset in tool measurement rot. sp 0
9776 $MM_CMM_MEAS_SETTINGS Settings for measuring cycles 0
9999 $MM_TRACE Test flags for internal diagnosis 0

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-83
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

7.2.2 Description of display machine data

9020 $MM_TECHNOLOGY
MD number Basic configuration turning/milling
Default setting: 2 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 2
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.1
Meaning: In this MD you define the basic configuration for simulation and free contour programming.
0 = No specific configuration
1 = Turning machine configuration
2 = Miller configuration

9021 $MM_LAYOUT_MODE
MD number Design of the user interface
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: In this MD you define the design of the user interface.
0 = Changed colors and softkeys
1 = Previous design of the user interface (as up to ShopMill 6.2)

9450 $MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT
MD number Limit value for wear, fine
Default setting: 0.999 Min. input limit: – Max. input limit: –
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: This MD defines the incremental upper limit (limit value for wear, fine) for the tool wear
(length, radius), that is, on input of the wear value in the tool wear list, the difference be-
tween the previous value and the new value must not exceed the incremental upper limit.
The incremental upper limit is only effective if the current protection level is higher than that
defined in MD 9203 USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE.
The absolute upper limit is defined in MD 9639 $MM_CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR.

9451 $MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT
MD number Limit value for fine adjustment
Default setting: 0.999 Min. input limit: – Max. input limit: –
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: When entering the fine adjustment the difference between the old and new value must not
exceed the value specified in this MD.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-84 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9460 $MM_PROGRAM_SETTINGS
MD number Settings in the program area
Default setting: H8 Min. input limit: – Max. input limit: –
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: Hex
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: Bit 0 to 4: Reserved
Bit 5: Display hidden lines (;*HD*) in the G-code editor

9478 $MM_TO_OPTION_MASK
MD number Settings for ShopMill
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0000 Max. input limit: FFFF
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 1 Unit: Hex
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: Bit 0: Display tool parameters “Number of teeth”, “Spindles”, “Coolant”, and “Tool-specific
functions” in the tool management.
Bit 1 and bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Disable creation of new tools directly in a magazine location.
Bit 4 to bit 6: Reserved
Bit 7: Disable change tool parameters when tools are located in the magazine (exception:
Wear data).
Bit 8: Evaluate file “to_mill.ini” for configuration of the user interface of tool management.
Bit 9: Disable load/unload tools when a program is being executed on the machine.
Bit 10: Compute tool wear inputs additively.
Bit 11 to bit 13: Spare

9479 $MM_TO_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE
MD number Distance between individual toolholders
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 10000.0
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: With this MD you define the distance between the individual toolholders in the graphic rep-
resentation of tools and magazine locations in tool management.
0 = The tools and magazine locations are not represented graphically.

Note:
If the machine has several magazines with differing distances between the toolholders, the
tools cannot be displayed proportionally to all magazines because only one setting option is
available for the distance.

9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X
MD number Simulation of default value X
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: –10000 Max. input limit: 10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the size of the X coordinate of the display area. When you press softkey
TO ORIGIN in simulation mode, you will go to the value set in this MD.
Corresponding to... MD 9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y
MD 9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-85
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y
MD number Simulation of default value Y
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: –10000 Max. input limit: 10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the size of the Y coordinate of the display area. When you press softkey
TO ORIGIN in simulation mode, you will go to the value set in this MD.
Corresponding to... MD 9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X
MD 9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA

9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA
MD number Simulation of default display area
Default setting: 100 Min. input limit: –10000 Max. input limit: 10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the size of the display area above the X coordinate. The Y coordinate is
calculated automatically from this setting.
Corresponding to... MD 9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X
MD 9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y

9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X
MD number Simulation of maximum display X
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: –10000 Max. input limit: 10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the size of the X coordinate of a second display area (e.g. for larger work-
pieces).
When you press softkey MAX in simulation mode, the value preset in this MD will apply.
Corresponding to... MD 9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y
MD 9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA

9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y
MD number Simulation of maximum display Y
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: –10000 Max. input limit: 10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the size of the Y coordinate of a second display area.
When you press softkey MAX in simulation mode, the value preset in this MD will apply.
Corresponding to... MD 9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X
MD 9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-86 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA
MD number Simulation of maximum display area
Default setting: 1000 Min. input limit: –10000 Max. input limit: 10000
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This machine data defines the second display area above the X coordinate. The Y coordi-
nate is calculated automatically from this setting.
Corresponding to... MD 9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X
MD 9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y

9626 $MM_CTM_TRACE
MD number Settings in ShopMill
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0000 Max. input limit: FFFF
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: Hex
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: Bit 0: Display ShopMill version “.../xy” in start–up screen.
Bit 1: Display system messages of ShopMill in the dialog line (for diagnostic purposes
only).
Bit 2 to bit 12: Reserved
Bit 13: Display cyclic processing time of ShopMill between 1st and 2nd vertical softkey (for
diagnostic purposes only).
Bit 14: Spare

9639 $MM_CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR
MD number Upper input limit for tool wear
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 10
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: This MD defines the absolute upper limit for the tool wear (length, radius), that is, on input
of the wear value in the tool wear list, the total value must not exceed the absolute upper
limit.
The incremental upper limit is defined in MD 9450 $MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-87
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9650 $MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM
MD number Position of coordinate system
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 47
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: You can use this MD to match the coordinate system of the user interface to that of the
machine. In the ShopMill user interface all help screens, sequence graphs, simulation, and
input fields with circle direction indication change automatically according to the selected
position.
The coordinate system can be in the positions listed below.
Also observe MD 9719 $MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK, bit 31.
+Z +Y +Z +X
+Y
+X +Y
+X +Z
0 +X 1 +Z 2 +Y 3
+Z +Z
+Y +Y +X
+X

+X +X +Z
+Y
4 5 +Z 6 +Y 7

+X +Z +X +Y
+Z
+Y +Z

+Y
8 +Y 9 +X 11 +X
10 +Z
+X +X
+Z +Y
+Z +Y

+Y +Y
+Z
12 13 +X 14 15 +X
+Z
+Y +X +Y +Z
+X +X
+Z
+Z +Y
16 +Z 17 +Y 18 +X 19

+Y +Y +Z
+X +X
+Z
+Z
+Z +X
20 21 22 23 +Y
+Y +X

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-88 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9650 $MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM
MD number Position of coordinate system
+Y +Z +Y +X
+Z
+X +Z
+X
+Z
24 +X 25 +Y 26 27 +Y

+Y +Y
+Z +Z +X
+X

+X +X +Z
28 29 +Y 30 +Z 31 +Y

+X +Y +X +Z
+Y
+Z +Y
+Z
+Y +X
32 +Z 33 +X 34 35

+X +X
+Y +Y +Z
+Z

+Z +Z
+Y
36 +X +X
37 38 +Y 39
+Z +X +Z +Y
+X +X
+Y

+Y +Y +Z
40 41 +Z 42 43
+X
+Z +Z
+X +Y
+X +Y
+Y
+Y +X
+Z +Z
44 45 46 +X 47

9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT
MD number Tool management concepts
Default setting: 2 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 4
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: Selection of two tool management variations:
2: Tool management without loading/unloading
4: Tool management with loading/unloading

9652 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL
MD number Tool monitoring
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD activates the tool monitoring.

0 = Tool monitoring is not displayed

1 = Tool monitoring is displayed

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-89
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9653 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS
MD number Enabling 4th axis for user interface
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 3
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: Enable 4th axis (e.g. A axis) for user interface:

0 = 4th axis is not displayed on the user interface

1 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface

2 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface and can be programmed

3 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface only for reference point approach

9654 $MM_CMM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES
MD number Number of decimal places in the speed input field
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 4
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD is for defining the number of decimal places in parameter field S (speed).

9655 $MM_CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST
MD number Lifting amount for deep hole drilling
Default setting: –1 Min. input limit: –1 Max. input limit: 100.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the retraction distance for deep hole drilling with chip break.
Note:
–1 means that the value for the amount of retraction can be entered on the user interface
(parameter “V2”, amount of retraction).

9656 $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST
MD number Lifting amount for boring
Default setting: –1 Min. input limit: –1 Max. input limit: 10.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the clearance distance traveled by the tool in the X and Z direction during
hole boring operations.
Note:
–1 means that the value of the retraction distance D can be entered in the operator inter-
face.

9657 $MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_CONT_PO_TO_RAD
MD number Indication of variation of the smallest possible cutter radius in %
Default setting: 5 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 50
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: %
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD is required for contour pocket milling. This parameter is for defining by which per-
centage the radius of a cutter used may be smaller than the one which was used for gener-
ating.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-90 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9658 $MM_CMM_CYC_MAX_CONT_PO_TO_RAD
MD number Indication of variation of the greatest possible cutter radius
Default setting: 0.01 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 10.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD is required for contour pocket milling. This parameter is for defining by which
amount the radius of a cutter used may be greater than the one which was used for gener-
ating.

9659 $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_ANGLE
MD number Tool orientation angle on retraction
Default setting: –1 Min. input limit: –1 Max. input limit: 360
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: degrees
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the spindle position (0...3600) at which the tool comes to a standstill, e.g.
drill toolholder in a hole.
Note:
–1 means that the value for the tool orientation angle can be input in the operator interface.

9660 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_PLANE_CHANGE
MD number Changing to machining plane (G17, G18, G19)
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: Enable change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19):

0 = Change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19) not possible

1 = Change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19) possible

9661 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES
MD number Number of input fields for tool-specific functions
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 4
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD activates the number of input fields for tool-specific functions:

0 = No display fields for tool-specific functions

1 = 1 field for one tool-specific function is displayed

2 = 2 fields for 2 tool-specific functions are displayed

3 = 3 fields for 3 tool-specific functions are displayed

4 = 4 fields for 4 tool-specific functions are displayed

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-91
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9662 $MM_CMM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS
MD number Number of gear steps
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 5
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD is for setting the number of gear steps (0 to 5) for the spindle. The possibility of
input in the user interface is thus restricted.

9663 $MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM
MD number Display radius/diameter for tool
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines how the tool is displayed or is to be input:
0 = Radius
1 = Diameter

9664 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN
MD number Max. feed in mm/min
Default setting: 10000.0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 100000.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/min.

9665 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT
MD number Max. feed in mm/rev
Default setting: 1.0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 10.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/rev
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/rev.

9666 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH
MD number Max. feed in mm/tooth
Default setting: 1.0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 5.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/tooth
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/tooth.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-92 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9667 $MM_CMM_FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIVE
MD number Tool preselection active
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines whether a tool preselection is active in a magazine (e.g. chain magazine),
i.e. the following tool is already brought to the load location for a pending tool change.
0 = Tool preselection is not active
1 = Tool preselection is active

9668 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II
MD number M function coolant I and II
Default setting: –1 Min. input limit: –1 Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Meaning: This machine data enables you to specify the M function if both coolants I and II are acti-
vated simultaneously in the tool list.
Value:
–1 = No M function
xy = M function xy for coolant I and II

9669 $MM_CMM_FACE_MILL_EFF_TOOL_DIAM
MD number Effective mill diameter for face milling
Default setting: 85.0 Min. input limit: 50.0 Max. input limit: 100.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: %
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Meaning: This MD specifies the effective cutter diameter for face milling. The effective cutter diameter
is derived from the ratio d/D, where d = cut diameter and D = largest cutter diameter.

d = 85
D = 100
d
Effective cutter diameter:
d/D = 85/100 = 0.85 –> 85%
D

9670 $MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKE
MD number Radius of approach circle for finishing cut on contour pockets plus half the final machining
allowance (–1=safety clearance)
Default setting: –1 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 100.0
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Meaning: This MD affects the radius of the approach circle when finishing contour pockets.
–1 = The radius is selected such that the safety clearance for final machining is observed at
the start point.
>0 = The radius is selected such that the value of this MD for final machining allowance is
observed at the start point.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-93
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9671 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_DEFAULT_MAG
MD number Default magazine, load tool
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 30
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: This MD defines the magazine in which ShopMill will search for a free location first when
loading a tool.

9672 $MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE
MD number Fixed location coding
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Meaning: This MD defines the state for newly created tools:
0 = Tools with flexible locations in the magazine
1 = Tools with fixed locations in the magazine

9673 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION
MD number Number of loading point
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 2
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Meaning: This MD allows you to specify the loading point used to load and unload the magazine and
the spindle. (The magazine and the spindle are always loaded/unloaded from the same
loading point.)
1 = Load point 1
2 = Load point 2

9674 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE
MD number Display of magazine list
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.4
Meaning: 0 = Magazine list is not displayed
1 = Magazine list is displayed

9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE
MD number Customer power-up display
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: Customer power-up display is activated if
0 = Siemens-configured customer power-up display
1 = Customer-configured customer power-up display

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-94 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9676 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1
MD number Path for drive names in directory management
Default setting: – Min. input limit: – Max. input limit: –
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: STRING (80 characters) Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 2nd softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in
the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a
blank string is entered in the display machine data.

9677 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2
MD number Path for drive names in directory management
Default setting: – Min. input limit: – Max. input limit: –
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: STRING (80 characters) Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 3rd softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in
the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a
blank string is entered in the display machine data.

9678 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3
MD number Path for drive names in directory management
Default setting: – Min. input limit: – Max. input limit: –
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: STRING (80 characters) Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 4th softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in
the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a
blank string is entered in the display machine data.

9679 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4
MD number Path for drive names in directory management
Default setting: – Min. input limit: – Max. input limit: –
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: STRING (80 characters) Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 5th softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in
the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a
blank string is entered in the display machine data.

9680 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I
MD number M function coolant I
Default setting: 8 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: This MD is set to define the M function for coolant I which is output when the tool is
changed.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-95
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9681 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II
MD number M function coolant II
Default setting: 7 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: This MD is set to define the M function for coolant II which is output when the tool is
changed.

9682 $MM_CMM_CYC_BGF_BORE_DIST
MD number Preboring depth for drill and thread milling
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.2
Meaning: This MD defines the preboring depth for drill and thread milling.

9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1
MD number 1st extended M function for tool-specific functions
Default setting: 100 Min. input limit: –1 Max. input limit: 255
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.2
Meaning: With this MD you define the 1st extended M function for the tool-specific functions. Please
note that the same setting must be made in interface signal DB82.DBB12 ext_m_cmd_1
(see also Chapter 3 “Reservations”).
Note:
–1 = The tool-specific functions are not assigned to an M function but you can evaluate the
tool-specific functions directly from the variables $TC_DP25[x,1], bits 0 to 3.

9685 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2
MD number 2nd extended M function for tool-specific functions
Default setting: 101 Min. input limit: –1 Max. input limit: 255
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.2
Meaning: With this MD you define the 2nd extended M function for the tool-specific functions. Please
note that the same setting must be made in interface signal DB82.DBB13 ext_m_cmd_2
(see also Chapter 3 “Reservations”).
Note:
–1 = The tool-specific functions are not assigned to an M function but you can evaluate the
tool-specific functions directly from the variables $TC_DP25[x,1], bits 0 to 3.

9686 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_OFF
MD number M function for coolant off
Default setting: 9 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32767
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.2
Meaning: This MD defines the M function for switching off the coolant which is output when the tool is
changed.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-96 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9687 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MOVE_DEFAULT_MAG
MD number Default magazine, move tool
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 30
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: This MD defines the magazine in which ShopMill will search for a free location first when
moving a tool.

9703 $MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_4
MD number Axis index for 4th axis
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 127
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: UBYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Meaning: The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.

9704 $MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_5
MD number Axis index for 5th axis
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 127
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: UBYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Meaning: The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.

9705 $MM_CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE
MD number Axis index for spindle
Default setting: 4 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 127
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: UBYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.3
Meaning: The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.

9718 $MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK_2
MD number Settings for ShopMill
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0000 Max. input limit: FFFF
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 1 Unit: Hex
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: Bit 0: Do not jump to Automatic mode when an external program (from the PLC) is selected
for execution.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-97
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9719 $MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK
MD number Settings for ShopMill
Default setting: H5 Min. input limit: 0000 Max. input limit: FFFF
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 1 Unit: Hex
Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: Bit 0: Display “ShopMill” softkey in program manager when creating new programs.
Bit 1: Spare
Bit 2: Do not automatically delete MDI buffer.
Bit 3 to bit 8: Spare
Bit 9: Start program processing in all screen forms.
Bit 10: Read performance data for Profibus drives directly from the drive.
Bit 11 to bit 17: Spare
Bit 18: When switching from manual/MDA/auto, change the operating mode but not the
ShopMill user interface.
Bit 19: Instead of “MCS” and “WCS” use texts “Machine” and “Workpiece”.
Bit 20: Display zero offsets not as “ZO1”, but as “G54” (except in the zero offset list).
Bit 21: Enable basic block display.
Bit 22 to bit 25: Reserved
Bit 26: Enable directory “Part programs” in program manager.
Bit 27: Enable directory “Subroutines” in program manager.
Bit 28 to bit 30: Reserved
Bit 31: Always display origin for G17 as follows: X to the right, Y upward, downward

9720 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS
MD number Enable 5th axis for user interface
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 3
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: Enable 5th axis (e.g. B axis) for user interface:

0 = 5th axis is not displayed on the user interface

1 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface

2 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface and can be programmed

3 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface only for reference point approach

9721 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL
MD number Enable signal for cylinder peripheral surface transformation
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: Enable the cylinder peripheral surface transformation function on the user interface:

0 = The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function is not displayed on the operator
interface

1 = The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function is displayed on the operator

interface

The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function can only be used if it has been
started up in the CNC-ISO user interface.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-98 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 7 Machine Data
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

9723 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELLING_HEAD
MD number Enable swiveling
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 5.1
Meaning: Enable the Swiveling function on the user interface.
0 = The Swiveling function is not displayed on the user interface
1 = The Swiveling function is displayed in the user interface
Swiveling can only be used if it has been started up in the CNC-ISO user interface.

9724 $MM_CMM_CIRCLE_RAPID_FEED
MD number Rapid traverse feed for positioning on circular path
Default setting: 5000 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100000
Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.2
Meaning: Use this MD to set the rapid traverse feed in mm/min for positioning on a circular path.

Note
For a description of the display machine data for measuring cycles, please re-
fer to Subsection 9.1.6 “Display machine data measuring cycles”.

9999 $MM_TRACE
MD number Test flags for internal diagnosis
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0000 Max. input limit: FFFF
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: Hex
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: Bit 0: Reserved
Bit 1: Display system messages of HMI in the dialog line (for diagnostic purposes only).
Bit 2 to bit 4: Spare

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 7-99
7 Machine Data 11.03
7.2 Display machine data for ShopMill

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

7-100 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Tool Management 8
8.1 Overview of functions

Option ShopMill only runs when the tool management option is set. It is shipped with
ShopMill as standard. The option is already set in the standard machine data
record for ShopMill.
References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

Data Data storage and management is carried out in the NC. All data can be read
and written by manual input, initialization routine, or data transmission.

Operation Operation is performed via system displays.

Programming Tool management enables you to call the tool by name, e.g. “Mill 120 mm”.
The tool call is still possible via the T No. (tool number). The T No. is then the
name of the tool.

PLC Separate PLC blocks are available for tool management to handle the commu-
nication between NC and PLC.

Tools A maximum of 250 tools can be set up on the PCU 20; on the PCU 50, the max-
imum number of tools is limited by MD 18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL.
9 tool edges can be defined for each tool.

Replacement tools A total of 98 replacement tools can be set up for each tool.

Magazine Chain and disk-type magazines can be managed. The maximum number of
magazines is set in the NC.
Display MD 9674 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE can be set to con-
ceal the magazine list.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-101
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.1 Overview of functions

Location coding Display MD 9672 $MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE determines whether all

tools have a fixed or variable location coding.

S Fixed assignment (MD 9672, value 1) means that the tool is permanently
assigned to a magazine location. This concept can be used for machines
with disk-type magazine.

S For variable location assignment (MD 9672, value 0), a tool with a tool num-
ber or tool name can be returned to a different magazine location from its
original one. This concept can be used for machines with chain magazine.
You can set individual tools to “fixed-location-coded” in the operator interface
(tool wear).

Disabling maga- Magazine locations can be disabled, e.g. for oversized tools occupying adjacent
zine locations magazine locations.

Monitoring The tool management system includes a tool monitoring function based on tool
functions edges that monitors according to tool life or tool loading operations. Replace-
ment tools (sister tools) are distinguished by their Duplo No. (DP). Display MD
9652 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL can be set to deactivate the tool
monitoring function.

Tool management Setting 2 of display MD 9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT can be se-

without load/ lected to set the tool management function without a load/unload softkey.
unload

Tool management Setting 4 of display MD 9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT can be se-

with load/unload lected to set the tool management function with a load/unload softkey.

Loading Loading brings the tool to its magazine location.

Unloading Unloading removes the tool from the magazine.

Sorting Tools can be sorted in the tool and tool wear lists according to magazine loca-
tion, name and type.

Manual tools Manual tools are tools that are stored in the tool list but not in the magazine.
These tools must be attached/detached manually to/from the spindle.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-102 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.1 Overview of functions

Other
functionalities S Load/unload point for tools by means of display MD 9673
$MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION

S Number of input fields for tool-specific functions by means of display MD

9661 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES

S Display tools as diameter or radius via display MD 9663

$MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM.

Modifying data

Note
Modifications to the tool and cutting edge data via system variables in the part
program are displayed in the tool list on the ShopMill operator interface only if
they refer to the tool currently loaded in the spindle.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-103
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.2 Start-up sequence

8.2 Start-up sequence

You can either start up tool management together with ShopMill start-up (see
Section 4.2 “Initial start-up sequence”) or subsequently.
Proceed as follows to start up tool management:
1. NC start-up
2. PLC start-up
3. Adapt display machine data
4. Create tool-changing cycle
If tool management already exists on your machine it is not necessary to install
one especially for ShopMill, i.e. start-up of the NC, the PLC, and the tool-chang-
ing cycle is not necessary, you only need to adapt the display machine data.
A precise description of tool management start-up is given in:
References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

Note
In the case of the PCU 50 you can also perform start-up of the tool manage-
ment (generate configuration file and PLC data) on the CNC-ISO user interface.
References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-104 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.3 Start-up in the NC

8.3 Start-up in the NC

Requirements
S PCU start-up is performed and the connection to the NC established.
S NC start-up is performed with the default machine data.

Execution
S Enter the NC machine data for tool management.
S Create a new configuration file for tool management or use and adapt the
examples from the NC toolbox.

S Load the configuration file in the control.

8.3.1 Input of the NC machine data

Machine data for the memory setting and activation of the management function
must be set.

Machine data for Memory space must be made available in the battery-backed RAM for the tool
memory setting management.

The following machine data must be set:

MD 18080 Activate the memory for tool management
MD 18082 Number of tools to be managed by the NCK
MD 18084 Number of magazines the NCK can manage (min. 3);
include the buffer and loading magazines!
MD 18086 Number of magazine locations that the NCK can manage;
include 3 buffer locations (2 grippers and 1 spindle) and
2 load points!
MD 18100 Number of cutting edges in the NCK

Note
ShopMill can manage 9 cutting edges per tool.
The total number of available cutting edges is defined in MD 18105
MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO.
It is not necessary to enter the number of tools times 9 cutting edges here. Just
enter the rough total number of cutting edges you require.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-105
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.3 Start-up in the NC

Example Allocation of machine data when a dual gripper is used so that manual tools can
be used even if the magazine (30 locations) is full:
18082=40; 40 tools (30 tools for the magazine + 10 tools as manual
tools)
18084=3; 1 magazine + 1 buffer magazine + 1 load magazine
18086=35; 30 magazine slots + 3 buffer memory + 2 load points
18100=80; 80 edges

Note
The machine data settings only reserve memory; locations are not assigned to
the magazine, etc. until the configuration file is set up and loaded (see Subsec-
tion 8.3.3 “Creating and loading the configuration file”).
Modifying the “memory-influencing” machine data reformats the battery-backed
RAM. The data must therefore be backed up beforehand.

Machine data for In addition, the following machine data must be set for activating the tool man-
activating the tool agement:
management
MD 20310 Channel-specific activation of the tool management
MD 20320 Activation of the life time monitoring for the specified spindle
MD 22550 New tool offset for M function
MD 22560 M function for tool change
MD 22562 Error reaction with programmed tool change

Note
Bits 0–3 of MD 20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and MD 18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK must always be set identically.

Default setting The NC machine data for tool management are in machine data record
CMM.8X0.
A detailed description of the NC machine data for tool management is given in
the next Subsection 8.3.2 “Description of the NC machine data for the tool man-
agement”.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-106 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.3 Start-up in the NC

8.3.2 Description of NC machine data

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
18080
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Activation of memory for tool management

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFF

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 1/4 Unit: HEX

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DWORD Valid as of SW: 4.3
Meaning: Activation of the tool management memory with “0” means:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The set tool management data do not occupy any memory, tool management is not
available.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bit 0=1: Memory for tool management specific data is made available, the MDs for
reserving memory must be set accordingly

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ (18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION, 18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bit 1=1: Memory is provided for monitoring data

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bit 2=1: Memory is provided for user data (CC data)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bit 3=1: Memory is provided for considering the adjacent location

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bit 4=1: Memory and function release for PI service _N_TSEARC = “Complex
search for tools in magazine” is initialized.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bit 5=1: Wear monitor active (SW5 and later, 840D)
Bit 6=1: Wear grouping available (SW5 and later, 840D)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Bit 7=1: Reserve memory for adapter of magazine locations

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Bit 8=1: Memory for insert and/or setup compensations
Bit 9=1: Tools of a turret no longer vacate their turret location on a tool change

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
(in the display)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The coded type of memory reservation enables economic use of the memory
management for the functionality provided.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Example:
Standard memory reservation for tool management:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD = 3 (bit 0 + 1=1) means tool management and tool monitoring data are ready
MD = 1 means TM without TM monitoring function data

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
18082 MM_NUM_TOOL

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Number of tools the NCK can manage
Default setting: 40 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 600

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Changes valid from: POWER ON

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Protection level: 2/4 Unit: ––

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DWORD

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning:
Valid as of SW: 2nd
The number of tools which the NCK can manage is entered here. Only as many tools as

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
there are tool edges in the NCK are possible.
Battery-backed memory is reserved for the number of tools.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7), Tool Offset (W1)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-107
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.3 Start-up in the NC

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
18084
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Number of magazines the NCK can manage

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 3
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: ––

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DWORD Valid as of SW: 2nd

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: Number of magazines the NCK can manage (active and background magazines). This
MD can be used to reserve battery-backed memory for the magazines.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Important: One load magazine and a buffer magazine is set up in the tool management for

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
each TOA unit. These magazines must be taken into account.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Value = 0: The tool management cannot be active because no data could be created.
Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
18086 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 35 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 600

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: ––
Data type: DWORD Valid as of SW: 2nd

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: Number of magazine locations that the NCK can manage.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
This MD reserves battery-backed memory for the magazine locations.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Important: The locations in the buffer and a load magazine must be taken into account.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Value = 0: The tool management cannot be active because no data could be created.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
18100
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Number of tool cutting edges per TOA block

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 80 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1500

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: ––

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DWORD Valid as of SW: 2nd
Meaning:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The MD specifies the number of tool edges in the NCK.
For each tool edge approx. 250 bytes per TOA block of the battery-backed memory are

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
reserved with this machine data irrespective of the tool type.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Tools with edges type 400–499 (=grinding tools) also occupy the location of a tool edge.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Example:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Define 10 grinding tools with one cutting edge each.
At least the following must apply:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MM_NUM_TOOL = 10

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA = 20
See also MM_NUM_TOOL

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Exceptional cases:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The data in the buffer are lost when the machine data are changed!
References: /FBW/, “Description of Functions Tool Management”

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-108 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.3 Start-up in the NC

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD number Channel-specific activation of tool management
Default setting: 0x0, ... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFFF
Change valid after POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: HEX
Data type: DWORD Valid as of SW: 2
Meaning: MD = 0: Tool management inactive
Bit 0=1: Tool management active
The tool management functions are activated for the current channel.
Bit 1=1: Tool management monitoring functions active
The functions required for monitoring the tools (tool life and quantity) are
activated.
Bit 2=1: OEM functions active
The memory for user data can be used (see also MD 18090 to 18098).
Bit 3=1: Consider adjacent location active
Bits 0 to 3 must be set identically to MD 18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Bit 4=1: The PLC is able to request a tool change preparation again with modified
parameters

Parts program is retained for T selection or M06 until acknowledged by the PLC
program

Bit 5=1: The master spindle main run can be stopped within one OB1 cycle
(e.g. by read-in stop) after output of a tool command.
Bit 5=0: The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.
Bit 6=1: The secondary spindle main run can be stopped within one OB1 cycle
(e.g. by read-in stop) after output of a tool command.
Bit 6=0: The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.
Bit 7=1: The master spindle main run is stopped until acknowledgment via FC7, FC8
with status 1... .
Bit 7=0: The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.
Bit 8=1: The secondary spindle main run is stopped until acknowledgment via FC7,
FC8 with status 1.
Bit 8=0: The secondary spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.
Bit 9: ReservedBit 10=1: M06 is delayed until the tool change has been prepared
via FC8 (status 1...) by the PLC.
The change signal (e.g. M06) is not output until the tool selection
(DBX [ n+0 ].2) is acknowledged. The parts program is stopped until the T
selection is acknowledged.
Bit 10=0: The tool change ON command is not output from NCK–> PLC until the PLC
preparation acknowledgment has been received. This acknowledgment is
relevant for PLC command 3 (i.e. programming of M06 in a block that does not
contain a T).
Bit 11=1: The preparatory command is also output even if it has already been output
once for the same tool. This is useful for positioning the chain when ‘’Tx‘’ is
called for the first time and checking whether the tool is located in the correct
change position (e.g. in front of the change station).
Bit 11=0: The preparatory command can be output only once for each tool.
Bit 12=1: The preparatory command is also carried out even if the tool is already in the
spindle. This means that the T selection signal (DB72.DBXn.2) is set even if it
has already been set for the same tool. (Tx...Tx)
Bit 12=0: The preparatory command is not executed if the tool is already mounted in
the spindle.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-109
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.3 Start-up in the NC

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD number Channel-specific activation of tool management
Meaning: Bit 13=1: Only on systems with sufficient memory capacity. Recording of tool sequences
in a diagnostics buffer. On Reset the commands from the diagnostics buffer are
stored in the passive file system (NCATR xx.MPF underparts program). This
file is required by the Hotline. Tool sequences are recorded in the diagnostics
buffer only on systems with sufficient memory capacity (NCU572, NCU573).
Bit 14=1: An automatic tool change takes place in response to Reset and Start
according to settings in the following machine data
20120 MD20120 TOOL_RESET_NAME
20110 MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
20124 MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
If the tool defined in TOOL_RESET_NAME must be loaded (set via
RESET_MODE_MASK), a selection and tool change command are output to
the user interface (DB72) with RESET or START.
If RESET_MODE_MASK is set to leave the active tool in the spindle, and if the
active tool is disabled in the spindle (by user), a change command for a
replacement tool is output to the user interface. If no replacement tool is
available, an error message is output.
Bit 14=0: No automatic tool change takes place in response to RESET and Start.
Bit 15=1: The tool is not returned if several preparatory commands are
output (Tx–>Tx).
This mode of function activation permits a variety of function combinations.
Example for default activation of the tool management:
MD 20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 3 (Bit0 + 1 = 1)
Bit16=1: T location number is active
Bit 15=0: The tool is not returned.
Bit 16=1: T location number is active.
Bit 17=1: Tool life decrementation can be started/stopped via the PLC in channel DB
2.1...DBx 1.3.
Bit 18=1: Activation of monitoring function “last tool in tool group”.
Bit 18=0: No monitoring for “last tool in tool group”
Bit 19=1: Activation for bits 5 to 8
Bit 19=0: The functions described under bits 5 to 8 are not available.
Bit 20=0: The generated commands are not output to the PLC in response to PLC signal
“Program testing active”. The NCK acknowledges the commands itself.
Magazine and tool data are not changed. Exception: The tool status of
the tool activated in the test area can change to “active”.
Bit 20=1: The generated commands are output to the PLC in response to PLC signal
“Program testing active”. Depending on the type of PLC acknowledgment,
tool/magazine data in the NCK can be altered at the same time. If the
acknowledgment parameters for the target magazine are set to the same
values as the source magazine, the tool is not transported and thus no data
modified in the NCK. Exception: The tool status of the tool activated in the test
area can change to “active”.
Bit 21=0: Ignore tool status “W” when selecting a tool.
Bit 21=1: Tools with “W” status cannot be selected by another tool change, tool
preparatory command.
Bit 22=0 Default setting
Bit 22=1 If the function T=“location” (see Bit16) is active, the tool groupsare automati–
cally divided into subgroups. $TC_TP11 is the rouping and selection parame–
ter. On the transition to the replacement tool, only those tools of the tool group
are recognized as replacement tools that have at least one bit in the $TC_TP11
value of the tool set in the programmed location.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-110 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.3 Start-up in the NC

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
20320
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Activation of life time monitoring for the spindle specified here

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 1/2 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 4
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: ––

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DWORD Valid as of SW: 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: Value = 1: Monitoring is carried out for spindle 1.
Value = 2: Monitoring is carried out for spindle 1 and spindle 2.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Further references:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
22550
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
TOOL_CHANGE_MODE

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number New tool offset for M function

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: ––

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: BYTE

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning:
Valid as of SW: 1.1

A tool is selected in the program with the T function. Whether the new tool is changed

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
immediately with the T function depends on the setting in this MD:
MD = 0

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The new tool is changed immediately with the T function. This setting is used mainly for

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
turning machines with tool revolver.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD = 1
The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function. This setting is mainly used on

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
milling machines with tool magazine to move the new tool to the tool change position in

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
parallel with machining (i.e. machining operation is not interrupted).
The M function entered in MD 22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE removes the old tool

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
from the spindle and loads the new tool into the spindle. According to DIN 66025, this tool
change must be programmed with the M function M06.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Corresponding to ... MD 22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Further references: Description of Functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD number M function for tool change
Default setting: 6 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 9999 9999
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: –
Data type: DWORD Valid as of SW: 1.1
Meaning: This MD is only active if MD 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1.
If the T function is used only to prepare a new tool for tool change (for milling machines with
tool magazine, this setting is mainly used to bring the new tool to the tool change position in
parallel with the machining time), the tool change must be initiated with a further M function.
The M function entered in the MD initiates the tool change (remove old tool from the spindle
and load the new tool in the spindle). According to DIN 66025, this tool change must be
programmed with the M function M06.
Corresponding to... MD 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Further references: Description of Functions: Tool Offset (W1)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-111
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.3 Start-up in the NC

22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
MD number Error reaction with programmed tool change
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 3
Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: –
Data type: DWORD Valid as of SW: 5.1
Meaning: If MD 22550 is set to 0, the default setting of MD 22562 should not be altered.
Bit 0=0: Standard response:
The program stops in the NC block containing the error.
Bit 0=1: If the error occurs in the block containing the tool change preparation
command, the alarm activated by the preparation command (T) is ignored until
the program run reaches the point at which the associated tool change
command (M06) is interpreted.
The alarm activated by the preparation command is not output until this
moment. The user cannot therefore make any corrections until this program
block is reached.
Bit 1=0: With active tool management only:
In preparing tool changes, the NCK detects only tools with data assigned to a
magazine.
Bit 1=1: With active tool management only:
The NCK also loads a tool whose data are stored in the NCK, but to which no
magazine is assigned.
In this case, the NCK attempts to assign the tool data to the programmed
spindle location automatically.
If several usable tools are available, another search is started for an active
tool. If no active tool can be found, the tool with the lowest duplo number is
selected.
Bit 2=0 Active D no. > 0 and active T no. = 0 equals an offset of zero
Active DL no. > 0 and active D no. = 0 equals a total offset of zero
Bit 2=1 Active D no. > 0 and active T no. = 0 generates an alarm message
Active DL no. > 0 and active D no. = 0 generates an alarm message
Bit 3 and bit 4: Only significant if tool management is active. Response of init. block
generation on program START if disabled tool is on the spindle and it is to
be activated. See also in particular: $MC_START_MODE_MASK and
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK. The response of ’leave disabled tool’ on the
spindle in particular remains active on RESET and is not affected.
Bit 3 = 0 If the tool on the spindle is disabled: Generate tool change command that
requests a replacement tool. If there is none an alarm is output.
Bit 3 = 1 The disabled status of the spindle tools is ignored. The tool becomes active.
The next part program should be formulated in such a way that no parts are
manufactured with the disabled tool.
Bit 4 = 0 An attempt is made to activate the spindle tool and its replacement tool.
Bit 4 = 1 If the tool on the spindle is disabled T0 is programmed in the start init. block.
Corresponding to... MD 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Further references: Description of Functions: Tool Offset (W1)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-112 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.3 Start-up in the NC

8.3.3 Creating and loading the configuration file

To start up the tool management function, you must create a configuration file
and load it to the NC.
Create a new configuration file for the tool management or adapt the examples
given in the toolbox.

Note
Make sure that you adapt the data in the configuration file with the machine
data for the tool management.

The configuration file must include the following settings:

S Define the type of search strategy

S Define the real magazine
S Define buffer magazine
S Define load magazine
S Define locations for the real magazine
S Define locations for the buffer magazine
S Define the spindle assignment
S Define the locations for the load magazine
S Define the distances for the real magazine

Load the configuration file to the NC.

Examples The following examples can be found in tools\sd in the toolbox:

S TM_WO_GR.8X0 (configuration without dual gripper, e.g. for a disk-type

magazine) containing the following:
– 1 real magazine with 30 locations
– 1 spindle
– 2 load points

S TM_W_GR.8X0 (configuration with dual gripper, e.g. for a chain magazine)

containing the following:
– 1 real magazine with 30 locations
– 1 spindle
– 2 grippers
– 2 load points
If necessary, adapt the configuration files in the lines typed in bold print.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-113
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.3 Start-up in the NC

Configuration file %_N_TO_TMA_INI

TM_W_GR.8X0 CHANDATA (1)
;–––––––––––––––––––
;Magazine configuration
;–––––––––––––––––––
;Delete old data
;––––––––––––––––
$TC_MAP1 [0]=0
$TC_DP1 [0,0]=0
;Type of search strategy
;–––––––––––––––––
$TC_MAMP2=257 ; search for active tools from
; 1st location onward
;Magazine definition
;––––––––––––––
;Real magazine
$TC_MAP1 [1]=1 ; magazine kind (1: chain)
$TC_MAP3 [1]=17 ; magazine status (17: enable active
magazine for loading)
$TC_MAP6 [1]=1 ; number of magazine tiers
$TC_MAP7 [1]=30 ; number of magazine locations
;Buffer magazine
$TC_MAP1 [9998]=7 ; magazine kind (7: buffer)
$TC_MAP3 [9998]=17
$TC_MAP6 [9998]=1
$TC_MAP7 [9998]=3 ; number of buffer locations
; (3: spindle with dual gripper)
;Load magazine
$TC_MAP1 [9999]=9 ; magazine kind (9: load magazine)
$TC_MAP3 [9999]=17
$TC_MAP6 [9999]=1
$TC_MAP7 [9999]=2 ; number of load points
;Locations in real magazine
;––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
;Location no. 1
$TC_MPP1 [1,1]=1 ; location kind (1: magazine loca–
tion)
$TC_MPP2 [1,1]=1 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [1,1]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)
$TC_MPP4 [1,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [1,1]=1 ; location kind index (1: location
no. 1)
;Location no. 2
$TC_MPP1 [1,2]=1 ; location kind (1: magazine loca–
tion)
$TC_MPP2 [1,2]=1 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [1,2]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)
$TC_MPP4 [1,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [1,2]=2 ; location type index (2: location
no. 2)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-114 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.3 Start-up in the NC

;Location no. 3
$TC_MPP1 [1,3]=1 ; location kind (1: magazine location)
$TC_MPP2 [1,3]=1 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [1,3]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)
$TC_MPP4 [1,3]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [1,3]=3 ; location kind index (3: loc. no. 3)
.
.
.
;Location no. 29
$TC_MPP1 [1,29]=1 ; location kind (1: magazine location)
$TC_MPP2 [1,29]=1 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [1,29]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)
$TC_MPP4 [1,29]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [1,29]=29 ; location kind index (29: loc. no. 29)
;Location no. 30
$TC_MPP1 [1,30]=1 ; location kind (1: magazine location)
$TC_MPP2 [1,30]=1 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [1,30]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)
$TC_MPP4 [1,30]=2 ; location status (2: free location)
$TC_MPP5 [1,30]=30 ; location kind index (30: loc. no. 30)
;Locations in buffer magazine
;–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
;Spindle
$TC_MPP1 [9998,1]=2 ; location kind (2: spindle)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,1]=0 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,1]=0 ; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,1]=1 ; location kind index (1: loc. no. 1)
;Gripper 1
$TC_MPP1 [9998,2]=3 ; location kind (3: gripper)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,2]=0 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,2]=0 ; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,2]=1 ; location kind index (1: loc. no. 1)
;Gripper 2
$TC_MPP1 [9998,3]=3 ; location kind (3: gripper)
$TC_MPP2 [9998,3]=0 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9998,3]=0 ; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9998,3]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9998,3]=2 ; location type index (2: loc. no. 2)
;Assignment of buffers to spindle
;–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
$TC_MLSR [2,1]=0 ; 1st gripper
$TC_MLSR [3,1]=0 ; 2nd gripper
;Locations on load magazine
;–––––––––––––––––––––––
;1st load magazine
$TC_MPP1 [9999,1]=7 ; location kind (7: load point)
$TC_MPP2 [9999,1]=0 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9999,1]=0 ; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9999,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9999,1]=1 ; location kind index (1: loc. no. 1)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-115
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.3 Start-up in the NC

;2nd loading station

$TC_MPP1 [9999,2]=7 ; location kind (7: load point)
$TC_MPP2 [9999,2]=0 ; location type
$TC_MPP3 [9999,2]=0 ; consider adjacent location
$TC_MPP4 [9999,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)
$TC_MPP5 [9999,2]=2 ; location type index (2: location
no. 2)
; Distances between load points/buffer and real magazine
;–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
$TC_MDP2 [1,1]=0 ; spindle
$TC_MDP2 [1,2]=0 ; gripper 1
$TC_MDP2 [1,3]=0 ; gripper 2
$TC_MDP1 [1,1]=0 ; 1st load point
$TC_MDP1 [1,2]=0 ; 2nd load point

M17

Variable The variables that are important for the configuration file are written here. For a
description detailed description of the system variables, see
References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

Magazine data $TC_MAP1[MagazineNo]= Magazine type

$TC_MAP1
S 1: chain
S 3: revolver
S 5: flat magazine
S 7: internal magazine tool buffer
S 9: internal magazine loading station

Magazine data $TC_MAP3[MagazineNo]= Magazine status

$TC_MAP3
Bit mask (specification applies for bit=1):

S Bit 0: active magazine

S Bit 1: blocked
S Bit 2: magazine is at load position
S Bit 3: tool motion is active
S Bit 4: enabled for loading
Default = 17 means: Active magazine, enabled for loading

Magazine data Number of magazines (in this case: 1)

$TC_MAP6

Magazine data Number of locations,

$TC_MAP7 e.g. number of buffer locations: 3 = 1 spindle and 2 grippers

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-116 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.3 Start-up in the NC

Search strategy $TC_MAMP2= Type of search strategy

$TC_MAMP2
This mask is divided into a right and left byte,

S the right byte describes the tool search (bits 0 and 1)

S the left byte describes the empty location search for the spindle tool.
A value must be specified for both strategies.

Bit mask (specification applies for bit=1):

S Bit 0: search for active tool with designation (1)

S Bit 1: search for next tool with designation (2)
S Bit 8: search from 1st location onwards (256)
S Bit 9: search from current location onwards (512)
S Bit 10: search from last location backwards (1024)
S Bit 11: search from current location backwards (2048)
S Bit 12: search from current location symmetrically (4096)

Example: $TC_MAMP2=4097 (bit 12 and bit 0=1)

Bit 12: Search for empty location: Search from current location symmetrically,
Bit 0: Tool search: Search for active tool

Location kind $TC_MPP1[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Location kind:

$TC_MPP1
S 1 = magazine location
S 2 = spindle
S 3 = gripper
S 4 = loader
S 5 = transfer location
S 6 = loading station
S 7 = load point
Default: Value of corresponding location type

Location type $TC_MPP2[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Location type:

$TC_MPP2
Any values can be entered here. The values must match the tools to be loaded
at the location.
Buffer and load point have the value 0!

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-117
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.3 Start-up in the NC

Consider adjacent $TC_MPP3[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Consider adjacent location on = 1

location $TC_MPP3
S Value = 1: the adjacent location is considered for the location
S Value = 0: the adjacent location is not considered for the location
S Value = 0: is to be entered for buffer and load locations!

Location status $TC_MPP4[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Location status (bit mask)

$TC_MPP4
S Bit 0: blocked
S Bit 1: free/allocated
Default: 2 = Location free

Location kind index $TC_MPP5[Magazine No., Location No.]= Location kind index
$TC_MPP5
For $TC_MPP1[Magazine No., Location No.]=1 (location kind is the magazine
location), the location number is entered here. For other location kinds, the kind
index is incremented:
Example with 2 grippers with location kind 3

S the first gripper has location index 1

S the second gripper has location index 2

Distances to maga- Distances to magazine

zine
$TC_MDP2[MagazineNo, BUFFno.]= Distances between buffer and magazine
A value must be entered for each buffer, at least a zero. The value is not inter-
preted here but is used only for assignment.
$TC_MDP1[MagazineNo, LoadpointNo]= Distances between load points and
magazine
One value must be entered for each load location here. It is interpreted when
calculating the location before the load point. Only for “Load point for spindle”
(location 1) is the value not interpreted but used “only” for magazine assign-
ment.

Spindle assignment $TC_MLSR[LocationNo of BUFF, LocationNo of spindle]= Assignment be-

tween buffer and spindle.
This enables determination of which buffer, e.g. gripper, may carry out tool
change to the spindle.
In ShopMill the tool change is initiated by a tool-changing cycle. This cycle is
called by the ShopMill cycles where a tool can be programmed.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-118 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

8.4 Start-up in the PLC

Requirements
S PCU start-up is performed and the connection to the NC established.
S NC start-up with the NC machine data for tool management is complete.
S The PLC basic program is loaded.

General

NCK PLC DB 4 PLC user

PLC basic program
program
block OB100
.
.
FC100

FC 6 DB 71 PLC user
PLC DB 72 program
basic PLC
Tool program user OB1
management block interface .
.
FB110,
DB 74 DB110
Internal
interface

Acknowledgment/
status
FC 8
PLC
basic
program
block

Fig. 8-1 Overview of tool management

FC 6 supplies data blocks DB71/72 with the information for the new and old
tools. FC 6 is called by the PLC basic program and need not be called again in
the PLC user program.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-119
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

So that the tool management always knows where the current tool is located,
each location change must be notified to the tool management via FC 8 (trans-
fer block). FC 8 (transfer block) is called by the PLC user program.
FB110 is available as an example for this.
The data blocks DB71/72 and 74 are set up automatically. The lengths of the
data blocks are determined by the parameters for the tool management in DB4.
DB4 is written by the PLC user program.
FB100 is available as an example for this.

Execution Implementing the FC 8 call and generating PLC data (DB4).

Either adapt the examples for blocks FC 100 and FB110 from the ShopMill li-
brary or use your own blocks.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-120 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

8.4.1 Example for FC 100 and FB 110

The ShopMill library contains two sources as examples of tool management.

Procedure
S Adapt one of the following source files and compile it:
– TM_WO_GR.AWL (data transfer without dual gripper, e.g. for a disk-type
magazine)
– TM_W_GR.AWL (data transfer with dual gripper, e.g. for a chain maga-
zine)

Source files TM_WO_GR.AWL and TM_W_GR.AWL contain the following

blocks:
– FC 100 (block for the PLC data of tool management)
– FB 110, DB 110 (blocks for data transfer in tool management)
The blocks for transferring tool management data (FB110, DB110) must be
adapted to suit the individual machine.

S Load the generated blocks to the PLC

S Call the blocks in OB 1 and OB 100:
– Call FC 100 in OB 100 (before FB 1)
– Call FB 110 in OB 1 (after FC 30)
The specified call sequence for these blocks is mandatory.

FC 100 Block FC 100 transfers the tool management PLC data to DB4.
The PLC data are set for two load points (DB71) and one spindle (DB72).
You will find a description of the signals of DB71 and DB72 in Subsection 8.4.2
“Signal description”.
The “Real MagLoc” parameter of FC 100 (number of locations of the real maga-
zine) must be assigned values when FC 100 is called.

FB 110 Block FB 110 controls the data transfer for tool management.
The block includes the following functions:

S Acknowledge load/unload/relocate for 1st load point

S Acknowledge load/unload for 1st load point
S Acknowledge prepare/change for 1st spindle
S Abort, i.e. negative acknowledgment for the above-mentioned functions

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-121
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

Acknowledgment of these functions can be enabled by the PLC by means of

the input parameters of FB 110, e.g. load/unload via customer key.
The default setting of the input parameters is such that they are acknowledged
automatically, so that block FB 110 can be used on testing stations without be-
ing linked to the machine (see Table 8-1 and 8-2). Automatic acknowledgment
is implemented by means of interface signals of the tool management data
blocks which you can skip individually.

Data transfer with- FB 110 from the AWL source TM_WO_GR.AWL may be used for data transfer
out dual gripper without dual gripper.
Tool change from the magazine to the spindle is carried out in one step here.
The tool magazine is changed directly into the spindle.

Table 8-1 Input parameters of FB 110 from TM_WO_GR.AWL

Signal Type Default Remarks

Prepare_IF1 BOOL TRUE Acknowledge preparation for spindle 1
Change_IF1 BOOL TRUE Acknowledge change for spindle 1
Load_IF1 BOOL TRUE Acknowledge loading for load point 1
Unload_IF1 BOOL TRUE Acknowledge unloading for load point 1
Relocate_IF1 BOOL TRUE Acknowledge relocation for load point 1
Load_IF2 BOOL TRUE Acknowledge loading for load point 2
Unload_IF2 BOOL TRUE Acknowledge unloading for load point 2
Reset_IF BOOL FALSE Abort for one of the above-mentioned func-
tions

Note
MD 9673 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION defines the interface via which the
magazine will be loaded or unloaded.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-122 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

Data transfer with FB 110 from the AWL source TM_W_GR.AWL may be used for data transfer
dual gripper with dual gripper.
The tool change is carried out in two steps by the magazine in the spindle. The
tool is first moved from the magazine to the gripper and then onto the spindle.

Table 8-2 Input parameters of FB 110 from TM_W_GR.AWL

Signal Type Default Remarks

Prepare_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable preparation for spindle 1
Change1_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable change step 1 (via gripper 1/2) for
spindle 1
Change2_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable change step 2 (via gripper 1/2) for
spindle 1
Load_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable loading for load point 1
Unload_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable unloading for load point 1
Relocate_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable relocation for load point 1
Load_IF2 BOOL TRUE Enable loading for load point 2
Unload_IF2 BOOL TRUE Enable unloading for load point 2
Reset_IF BOOL FALSE Abort for one of the above-mentioned func-
tions

Note
MD 9673 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION defines which interface will be loaded/
unloaded.

8.4.2 Signal description

Overview of The following data blocks are used by the tool management, i.e. they must not
data blocks be assigned by the PLC user program:
DB71 For load/unload points
DB72 For spindle as change position
DB74 Internal data block for tool management
If the data of magazines, buffer memories or loading positions are changed in
the start-up branch, then data blocks DB 71 to DB 74 must be deleted and the
PLC restarted.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-123
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

Description of
DB71

DB71 Signals of load/unload points

Data block NCK–>PLC interface
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Interfaces
DBB 0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB 1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
DBB 2, 3
DBB n + 0 NC program Position at Relocate Unload Load
positions load point
magazine
DBB n+1 Unassigned
DBB n+2 Assigned channel (8bit-Int)
DBB n+3 Tool management number (8bit-Int)
DBD n+4 $P_VDITCP[0]
User parameter 0 (DWord)
DBD n+8 $P_VDITCP[1]
User parameter 1 (DWord)
DBD n + 12 $P_VDITCP[2]
User parameter 2 (DWord)
DBW n + 16 Identifier for load/unload point (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBW n + 18 Location no. of load/unload point (Int)
DBW n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)
DBW n + 22 Location no. (source) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)
DBW n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)
DBW n + 26 Location no. (target) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)
DBW n + 28 Spare

Initial addresses of load/unload points:

Load/unload point 1: n = 4
2: n = 34
3: n = 64
4: n = 94
Example calculation of address DBW n+24 (magazine no. target)
n = (m–1) * len + 4 m = Location no. of loading location/point
len = 30 (length of a load point)
m=2; len = 30 n = (2–1) * 30 + 4 ==> n = 34
DBW (34 + 24) = DBW 58
Address for magazine no. target of 2nd load point is DBW 58.
Load point 1 is intended for loading/unloading in all spindles. This must be
taken into account in the load interface assignment (applies to PCU 20; auto-
matically taken into account in PCU 50). Load point 1 is also used for relocation/
positioning of tools in any location (e.g. buffer location).

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-124 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

Description of
DB72

DB72 Spindle as change point

Data block
NCK–>PLC interface
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBB 0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB 1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
DBB 2, 3
DBB n+0 Spare Detach Attach OldTool in TO Prepare Change tool Obliga-
manual tool manual BL No. change (initiated by: tory
tool (n+42) M06) change

DBB n+1 Unassigned

DBB n+2 Assigned channel (8bit-Int)
DBB n+3 Tool management number (8bit-Int)
DBD n+4 $P_VDITCP[0]
User parameter 0 (DWord)
DBD n+8 $P_VDITCP[1]
User parameter 1 (DWord)
DBD n + 12 $P_VDITCP[2]
User parameter 2 (DWord)
DBW n + 16 Buffer identifier (Int), fixed value 9998)
equals “Target position for new tool”
DBW n + 18 Relative location (target) in buffer magazine (Int)
DBW n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for new tool (Int)
DBW n + 22 Location no. (source) for new tool (Int)
DBW n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for old tool (Int)
DBW n + 26 Location no. (target) for old tool (Int)
DBW n + 28 New tool: Location type (Int)
DBW n + 30 New tool: Size left (Int)
DBW n + 32 New tool: Size right (Int)
DBW n + 34 New tool: Size top (Int)
DBW n + 36 New tool: Size bottom (Int)
DBW n + 38 Tool status for new tool
Tool has Tool with Prewarn Measure Enable Active
been used fixed loc. lim. tool tool tool
code reached
DBW n + 40 New tool: Internal T no. of NCK (Int)
DBW n + 42 If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then the buffer location of the old tool must be entered here
DBW n + 44 Spare
DBW n + 46 Spare

Initial addresses of spindles: spindle 1: n = 4

spindle 2: n = 52
spindle 3: n = 100
n = (m–1)* len + 4 m = Location no. of change position
len= 48

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-125
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

Note
DBB (n+1) to DBW (n+46) are updated with a T selection only.

A description of data blocks DB71 and DB74 can be found in

References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

DB72
DBX 0.0 – 0.15 Active status of interface 1–16
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Signal state 1 Associated interface has a valid block, a tool change request has been initiated.
Signal state 0 Process for this interface is complete.

DB72
DBB(n+0) Tool change information
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 5
Meaning Bit 0: Obligatory change
Bit 1: Change tool (initiated by M06)
Bit 2: Prepare change
Bit 3: “T 0” is programmed
Bit 4: Old tool in buffer number (n+42)
Bit 5: Attach manual tool
Bit 6: Detach manual tool
Bit 7: Spare

Note
The bits in DBB (n+0) ( prepare change, change tool,...) are not reset by the
system. They are up-to-date only if the appropriate interface bit in DBB0 is set
to “1’’. However, the bits can be reset by the user if necessary.

DB72
DBB(n+2) Assigned channel
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Channel no. to which active interface applies

DB72
DBB(n+3) Tool management no.
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Associated tool management number

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-126 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

DB72
DBD(n+4) User parameter 0 (DInt)
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning $P_VDITCP[0]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts
program.

DB72
DBD(n+8) User parameter 1 (DInt)
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning $P_VDITCP[1]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts
program.

DB72
DBD(n+12) User parameter 2 (DInt)
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning $P_VDITCP[2]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts
program.

DB72
DBW(n+16) Buffer magazine no. (fixed value 9998) target position for new tool
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Magazine no. 9998 for all buffer magazines, target magazine for new tool

DB72
DBW(n+18) Location in buffer magazine (spindle)
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Location of buffer magazine to which the new tool must be loaded. This is normally the
spindle. The location number defined for this particular buffer during start-up is output.

DB72
DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (source) for new tool
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Source magazine no. of new tool
Corresponding to... DBW(n+22)

DB72
DBW(n+22) Location no. (source) for new tool
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Source location no. of new tool
Corresponding to... DBW(n+20)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-127
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

DB72
DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (target) for old tool
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Number of magazine to which old tool must be loaded.
Corresponding to... DBW(n+26)

DB72
DBW(n+26) Location no. (target) for old tool
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Number of location to which old tool must be loaded
Corresponding to... DBW(n+26)

DB72
DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning The location type of the new tool is entered here.
Corresponding to... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom

DB72
DBW(n+30) New tool: Size left
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Specification of tool size on left in half-locations for new tool.

DB72
DBW(n+32) New tool: Size right
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Specification of tool size on right in half-locations for new tool.

DB72
DBW(n+34) New tool: Size top
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Specification of tool size at top in half-locations for new tool.

DB72
DBW(n+36) New tool: Size bottom
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Specification of tool size at bottom in half-locations for new tool.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-128 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.4 Start-up in the PLC

DB72
DBW(n+38) Tool status for new tool
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Bit 0: Active tool
Bit 1: Tool enabled
Bit 2: Tool disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool has been used

DB72
DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T no. of NCK
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2
Meaning Display of internal T no. of NCK for the new tool.

DB72
DBW(n+42) Reserved
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid as of SW:
Meaning

DB72
DBW(n+44) Reserved
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid as of SW:
Meaning

DB72
DBW(n+46) Reserved
Data block Signal(s)
Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid as of SW:
Meaning

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-129
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.5 Display machine data

8.5 Display machine data

Display machine data enable you to activate certain functions and settings at
the user interface.
MD 9450 $MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT
Limit value for wear, fine
MD 9478 $MM_TO_OPTION_MASK
Settings for ShopMill
MD 9639 $MM_CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR
Upper input limit for tool wear
MD 9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT
Tool management variant
MD 9652 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL
Tool monitoring
MD 9661 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES
Number of input fields for tool-specific functions
MD 9663 $MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM
Radius/diameter display for tool
MD 9667 $MM_CMM_FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIVE
Tool preselection active
MD 9671 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_DEFAULT_MAG
Default magazine, load tool
MD 9672 $MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE
Fixed location coding
MD 9673 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION
Number of loading station
MD 9674 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE
Magazine list display
MD 9687 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MOVE_DEFAULT_MAG
Default magazine, move tool
The default setting and machine data description can be found in Section 7.2
“Display machine data for ShopMill”.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-130 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.6 Tool change cycle

8.6 Tool change cycle

Operating The ShopMill tool change cycle performs the following tasks:
sequence

1. Deactivate compensation of the active tool

2. Select new tool

(from the programmed cycle screen)

3. Call tool change cycle L6

Note: Tool change cycle L6 is called with M6.

4. Output of tool-specific functions depending on the setting in the

relevant column of the tool table
S Number of teeth
S M3/M4/M5 from column “Spindle right/left/off”
S Coolant 1 and 2 from columns “Coolant 1 on/off”,
“Coolant 2 on/off”
S Tool-specific functions 1...4 from columns
“Tool-spec. fct. 1”, “Tool- spec. fct. 2”, “Tool-spec. fct. 3”,
“Tool-spec. fct. 4”

5. Select tool edge D

(tool edge number from programmed cycle screen)

6. Preselect next tool

(is automatically entered by the ShopMill programming)

Fig. 8-2 ShopMill tool change cycle

Note
The number of teeth is stored in tool edge parameter 24 ($TC_DP24), the
spindle direction of rotation, the coolant, and the tool-specific functions in tool
edge parameter 25 ($TC_DP25).

You need to create a tool change cycle, e.g. L6, for the machine-specific parts
of the tool change.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-131
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.6 Tool change cycle

Example Example L6.SPF in the toolbox shows how to do this. This example requires:

S MD 22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1
Tool is changed via an M function.

S MD 10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[0]=6
M function (M6) used to call the tool change, i.e. the subroutine assigned via
MD 10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0].

S MD 10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0]=“L6”
Name of the subroutine (L6) to be executed after the M function defined in
MD 10715.
If the subroutine name is to be entered by means of program or MDI, the
name must be enclosed in quotation marks. This does not apply to manual
inputs.

S MD 22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE=206
M function (M206) with which the tool change is defined for the tool manage-
ment.
The machine data specified above can be found in the toolbox in machine data
set CMM.8X0.
PROC L6 SAVE
;______________________________________________________
;Example tool change cycle for machine manufacturer
;_______________________________________________________
DEF INT _WZ_IN_SP,_WZ_VOR
DEF REAL _WWP=... ; tool change position
; MCS
DEF REAL _SPP=... ; spindle position
;
STOPRE ; preprocessing stop
;
IF (NOT $P_SEARCH) ; if no block search
_WZ_IN_SP=$TC_MPP6[9998,1] ; tool in spindle
GETSELT(_WZ_VOR) ; preselected tool
;
IF (_WZ_IN_SP<>_WZ_VOR) ; if another tool is used
; position spindle:
SPOS=_SPP
; approach tool change position:
SUPA D0 G0 G90 G40 G60 Z=_WWP
ENDIF
ELSE
IF (E_SIM_ACTIVE) ; if simulation active
; approach tool change position:
SUPA D0 G0 G90 G40 G60 Z=_WWP
ENDIF
ENDIF
;
; change tool: Tool management and PLC
M206
STOPRE ; preprocessing stop
M17

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-132 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.6 Tool change cycle

Note
In the example of tool change cycle L6 you must replace “...” with values in
lines “DEF REAL _WWP=...” and “DEF REAL _SPP=...”.

Tool change cycle L6 contains the following steps:

1. Position spindle (not when simulation is active)
2. Approach tool change positions in the machine coordinate system
3. Execute tool change (M206)
The tool must be at a safe height after tool change so that all motions in the
plane are permissible.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-133
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.7 Manual tools

8.7 Manual tools

Manual tools are tools which are required during machining, but are only avail-
able in the tool list but not in the tool-holding magazine. These tools must be
attached/detached manually to/from the spindle.
Machine data 22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 1=1,
can be set to allow tools without a magazine location assignment to be selected
for tool changes.
An alarm is output every time the manual tool is loaded, unloaded or replaced.
(e.g. “Channel 1, manual tool mill20, duplo no. 1 load to toolholder 1.” i.e. the
manual tool mill20 must be attached to the spindle.)
Manual tools are identified by magazine location 1 in magazine 9999 in the in-
terface to the PLC. Bit 5 in DB72 DBB (n+0) is set to load the tool and bit 6 to
unload it.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-134 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.8 Activating the spindle, coolant, and tool-specific functions

8.8 Activating the spindle, coolant, and tool-specific func-

tions

Spindle, coolant In the tool management, you can assign direction of rotation (CW/CCW/off) and
coolant to a tool.

Cursor texts: “Spindle ri/le/off” “Coolant 1/2

on/off”

Fig. 8-3 Tool list: Coolant and spindle direction of rotation

Make the assignment between the coolant and the appropriate M functions in
the following machine data:
MD 9680 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I
MD 9681 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II
MD 9668 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II
MD 9686 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_OFF

Tool-specific func- Tool-specific functions 1...4 are intended for other machine functions that can be
tions activated for a tool, for example, third coolant, speed monitoring, tool breakage
etc.

Cursor texts: “Tool-spec. fct. 1...4”

Fig. 8-4 Tool list: Tool-specific functions 1...4

The fields in the tool list can be grayed out with the display MD 9661, CMM_EN-
ABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES = 0.
Tool-specific functions 1...4 are output by the ShopMill tool change cycle after
M6 for a PLC cycle in DB82.
Tool-specific functions 1 ... 4 in DB82:
DB82 DBX42.0 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_on
DB82 DBX42.1 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_on
DB82 DBX42.2 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_on
DB82 DBX42.3 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_on
DB82 DBX42.4 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_active
DB82 DBX42.5 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_active
DB82 DBX42.6 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_active
DB82 DBX42.7 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_active

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-135
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.8 Activating the spindle, coolant, and tool-specific functions

Bits DB82.DBX42.4...7 indicate whether the function displayed in bits

DB82.DBX42.0...3 is valid. The signal is low active.

Example The following functions are programmed in screen form “Machine functions”
under menu “Program”→ “Straight-line-circle”:
Tool-specific function 1: On
Tool-specific function 2: No change
Tool-specific function 3: Off
Tool-specific function 4: No change
M functions M1=100 and M10=101 are generated. The following bits are set in
DB82.DBB42:

Table 8-3 DB82.DBB42

Bit Status Function

0 1 Activate tool-specific function 1
1 0 No change to tool-specific function 2
2 0 Deactivate tool-specific function 3
3 0 No change to tool-specific function 4
4 0 Accept function from bit 0
5 1 Do not accept function from bit 1
6 0 Accept function from bit 2
7 1 Do not accept function from bit 3

Note
Tool-specific functions are output from the HMI to the ShopMill interface using
M functions with extended address (see Chapter 3 “Reservations”).

Special features of In “MANUAL” mode, no spindle direction of rotation, coolant and tool-specific M
“MANUAL” mode functions are output to the PLC. On tool change in the “MANUAL” mode, these
functions can be initiated by the operator using the keys on the machine control
panel (implementation via PLC user program).

Changing cursor You can change the cursor texts for “Coolant 1/2 on/off” and “Tool-spec. fct. 1,
texts ...” (see Section 8.9 “Modifying texts for tool-specific functions”).

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-136 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.9 Modifying texts for tool-specific functions

8.9 Modifying texts for tool-specific functions

8.9.1 PCU 20

For tool-specific functions, you can modify the parameter texts in the Program-
operating area – linear/circular, “Machine functions” menu and the cursor texts
in the tool list. Cursor texts are texts, shown in the message line when the cur-
sor is positioned on the relevant input field.
You can use the aluc.txt text file on the application diskette to modify the texts of
the tool-specific functions.

Text numbers The texts are assigned to the following text numbers in the file “aluc.txt”:

Table 8-4 Text assignment

Cursor texts in the “Tool list” menu Text number

Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1) 89911
Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2) 89912
Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3) 89913
Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4) 89914
Coolant 1 89921
Coolant 2 89922
Parameter texts in the
“Program straight line/circle machine function” menu
Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1) 89915
Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2) 89916
Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3) 89917
Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4) 89918
Coolant 1 89919
Coolant 2 89920

This means that text numbers 89911 and 89915 etc. refer to the same func-
tions.

Note
The maximum number of character is 23 for the cursor texts and 14 for the pa-
rameter texts.

Language Each language directory contains a file named “aluc.txt”.

assignment

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-137
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.9 Modifying texts for tool-specific functions

Procedure To select file aluc.txt, proceed as follows:

S Switch to the subdirectory ...\instutil in the application environment.

S Call the APP_INST program.
S Select <2> “Modify configuration”.
S Specify whether the texts for the 1st or 2nd language are to be edited:
<4> “Edit text files for first language” or
<5> “Edit text files for second language”

S Scroll through the menu until the option “alarm texts for user cycles”
appears and then enter the corresponding number.
This opens the text file ALUC.TXT with the DOS editor “edit”.

S Enter the texts of your choice.

S Save the file and close the editor.
S Press the “ESC” key twice.

The text modifications become operative when you take the following steps:

S Select <1> “Install all modules on hardware”.

S Confirm your language selection with “F4 Accept”.
S Select <2> “Create Flash Memory Card image”.
S Specify the source drive for the system disks.
S Specify the target path for the system disks.
S Enter the target drive to which the file must be saved.
S Specify the target path for the file.
S Use SINUCOPY to create a PC card (see Subsection 4.2.2 Start-up on a
PCU 20).

S Load the PC card contents to the control (see Subsection 4.2.2 Start-up on
a PCU 20).

Example The cursor text “Tool-spec. function 1” in the tool list should be changed to “Air
cooling”.
You must make the following entry in file “aluc.txt”:
89911 0 0 “Air cooling”
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-138 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.9 Modifying texts for tool-specific functions

8.9.2 PCU 50

For tool-specific functions, you can modify the parameter texts in the Program-
operating area – linear/circular, “Machine functions” menu and the cursor texts
in the tool list. Cursor texts are texts, shown in the message line when the cur-
sor is positioned on the relevant input field.
The desired texts must be entered in the text file F:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_xx.com. The
file “aluc_xx.com” may have to be created in directory “cus.dir”.
Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file F:\user\mbdde.ini:
UserZYK=F:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

Text numbers The texts are assigned to the following text numbers in the file “aluc_xx.com”:

Table 8-5 Text assignment

Cursor texts in the “Tool list” menu Text number

Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1) 89911
Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2) 89912
Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3) 89913
Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4) 89914
Coolant 1 89921
Coolant 2 89922
Parameter texts in the
“Program straight line/circle machine function” menu
Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1) 89915
Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2) 89916
Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3) 89917
Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4) 89918
Coolant 1 89919
Coolant 2 89920

This means that text numbers 89911 and 89915 etc. refer to the same func-
tions.

Note
The maximum number of character is 23 for the cursor texts and 14 for the pa-
rameter texts.

Language The text language is assigned on the basis of the text file name. “xx” is replaced
assignment by one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-139
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.9 Modifying texts for tool-specific functions

Table 8-6 Language assignment

Abbreviation Language
xx
gr German
uk English
fr French
it Italian
sp Spanish
nl Dutch
dk Danish
fi Finnish
sw Swedish
pl Polish
tr Turkish
ch Chinese,
simplified characters
tw Chinese,
traditional characters
ko Korean
hu Hungarian
po Brazilian
Portuguese
ru Russian
cz Czech
ja Japanese

Example The cursor text “Tool-spec. function 1” in the tool list should be changed to “Air
cooling”.
You must make the following entry in file “aluc_gr.com”:
89911 0 0 “Air cooling”
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.
Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file F:\user\mbdde.ini:
UserZYK=F:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-140 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.10 Configuring the operator interface

8.10 Configuring the operator interface

There are 2 ways of modifying the existing tool management operator interface:

S In addition to the existing lists, you can activate a further list in the tool man-
agement on the 3rd horizontal softkey.

S In the existing lists (including the additional list), you can configure the exist-
ing or user-defined parameters variably depending on the tool.

8.10.1 Procedure

If you want to activate an additional list or change lists, you must perform the
following steps. You will find further information about the configuration file and
text generation in the further sections.

Activating the
additional list
S Defining texts for the additional list (optional)
If you want to change the default texts for softkey labeling and the header of
the additional list, you must define new texts.

S Setting machine data

9478 $MM_TO_OPTION_MASK, bit 2
Activate additional list
18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2
Provide memory for user data
18094 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM=2
2 user-defined parameters
18095 $MN_MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM[n]=4
Data type (DOUBLE) of the user-defined parameters
20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2
Activate user functions
You can call an example list with 2 user-defined parameters in the tool manage-
ment via the 3rd horizontal softkey.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-141
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.10 Configuring the operator interface

Changing lists
S Creating a configuration file
You must store every change to the list default settings in configuration file
TO_MILL.INI.

S Defining texts for user-defined parameters (optional)

If you use user-defined parameters, you must define column headers and
cursor texts for them.

S Setting machine data

MD 9478 $MM_TO_OPTION_MASK, bit 8
Evaluate file TO_MILL.INI

S Defining machine data for user-defined parameters (optional)

If you use user-defined parameters, you must set the following machine
data:
MD 18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2
Provide memory for user data
MD 18094 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
Number of user-defined parameters
MD 18095 $MN_MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM[n]=4
Data type (DOUBLE) of the user-defined parameters
MD 20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2
Activate user functions

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-142 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.10 Configuring the operator interface

8.10.2 Creating a configuration file

You must store every change to the list default settings in configuration file
TO_MILL.INI.
In this regard, please note the following:

S You can define up to 13 columns after the “DP number” column.

S Define the cutting edge parameters in successive columns.
S Define either edge parameters or tool parameters, but not both, in one col-
umn.
For the PCU 20 you will find an example of the configuration file on the applica-
tion diskette. You can adapt this example and must then install it together with
the ShopMill software.
For the PCU 50, you will find an example configuration file in directory
F:\MMC0W32 after you have installed ShopMill. You can adapt this example
and must then place it in the OEM directory.

Syntax The following syntax rules applies to entries in the configuration file (see also
example at end of this section):
First specify the list in which you wish to make changes.
[SCREEN_ID]
SCREEN_ID: Tool management list
Next, define the changes themselves:

S Change a particular column for all tools:

COLUMNx=CONTENT_ID
COLUMN: Column command
x: Column number, max. 13
CONTENT_ID: Parameter or property of tool

S Change a particular column for a particular tool:

TOOL_ID = x=CONTENT_ID
TOOL_ID: Tool type

S Define different columns for each:

TOOL_ID = CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ...
TOOL_ID = CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ...
...

The parameters or properties of a tool are listed consecutively on the basis

of a CONTENT_ID and separated from one another by an oblique symbol
“/”. Even if you want to use the default setting for individual columns, you
must still enter the oblique symbol.

If, for example, you want to change only the last columns, enter the number
(x) of the first column that you wish to alter and then list the appropriate
CONTENT_ID for the following columns.
TOOL_ID = x=CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ..

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-143
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.10 Configuring the operator interface

Note
Using the COLUMN command, you can first define one column identically for
all tools and then adapt it specifically for individual tools.

You can identify comments by a semicolon (;) symbol.

If errors occur as the configuration file is being evaluated, you will find a descrip-
tion of the error in file TO_INI_F.COM in directory “temp”.

Identifiers The SCREEN_, TOOL_ and CONTENT_IDs which are available for defining
columns are listed below.

Table 8-7 SCREEN_IDENTIFIER

SCREEN_IDENTIFIER Tool management list

TOOL_LIST Tool list
TOOL_LIST_2ND_EDGE Tool list, further cutting edges
TOOL_WEAR Tool wear list
TOOL_WEAR_2ND_EDGE Tool wear list, further cutting edges
TOOL_MAGA Magazine list
TOOL_LIST_OEM Additional list

Table 8-8 TOOL_IDENTIFIER

TOOL_IDENTIFIER Tool
SHANK_END_CUTTER (End) mill
POINTED_DRILL (Twist) drill
LOCATOR Centering tool
3DTRACER 3D probe
EDGE_TRACER Edge probe
3DCUTTER_110 Cylindrical die mill
3DCUTTER_111 Ball end mill
3DCUTTER_121 End mill with corner rounding
3DCUTTER_155 Bevel cutter
3DCUTTER_156 Bevel cutter with corner rounding
3DCUTTER_157 Tapered die mill

Table 8-9 CONTENT_ID

CONTENT_ID Parameter or property

EMPTY Empty field
NOT_USED Empty column

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-144 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.10 Configuring the operator interface

Table 8-9 CONTENT_ID

CONTENT_ID Parameter or property

LENGTH Length
RADIUS Radius
RADIUS_DIAM Radius with possible diameter calculation
ANGLE Angle
N Number of teeth
SPINDLE Spindle direction
COOL1 Cooling water 1
COOL2 Cooling water 2
MFCT1 Tool-specific function 1
MFCT2 Tool-specific function 2
MFCT3 Tool-specific function 3
MFCT4 Tool-specific function 4
DLENGTH Wear length
DRADIUS Wear radius
DRADIUS_DIAM Wear radius with possible diameter calculation
T_OR_C Method of wear monitoring
P_TIME Service life
PW_TIME Prewarning limit service life
P_COUNT Quantity
PW_COUNT Prewarning limit quantity
T_LOCKED Tool disabled
T_SIZE Oversized tool
T_FIXED Tool in fixed location
P_LOCKED Magazine location disabled
MAG_T_LOCKED Display only: Tool disabled
MAG_T_SIZE Display only: Oversized tool
MAG_T_FIXED Display only: Tool in fixed location
H_NBR H number of an ISO dialect program
TPC1 Parameter 1
TPC2 Parameter 2
TPC3 Parameter 3
TPC4 Parameter 4
TPC5 Parameter 5
TPC6 Parameter 6
TPC7 Parameter 7
TPC8 Parameter 8
TPC9 Parameter 9
TPC10 Parameter 10

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-145
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.10 Configuring the operator interface

Table 8-9 CONTENT_ID

CONTENT_ID Parameter or property

T_SIZE_LONG Tool size
The parameter is not contained in the ShopMill standard
tool list.
Column header: LROU
Cursor text: Tool size
Input: Number of adjacent half-locations (up to 7) are to be
deactivated. The first half-location is always the current
magazine location. The number of adjacent half-locations is
entered as a four–digit number. The first number refers to
the adjacent locations to the left, the second to the right-
hand locations, the third to the locations above and the
fourth to the locations below.
Precondition for input: The tool must be located outside the
magazine.
T_MAG_PLACE Magazine location type
The parameter is not contained in the ShopMill standard
tool list.
Column header: Location type
Cursor text: Magazine location type
Input: Number of the magazine location type

The H number parameter only appears if ShopMill is set up for ISO dialects (see
Section 11.2 “ISO dialects”).

Example ;Tool list

[TOOL_LIST]

;Column default settings

COLUMN1 = H_NBR
COLUMN2 = LENGTH
COLUMN3 = RADIUS_DIAM
COLUMN4 = EMPTY
COLUMN5 = EMPTY
COLUMN6 = SPINDLE
COLUMN7 = COOL1
COLUMN8 = COOL2
COLUMN9 = MFCT1
COLUMN10= MFCT2
COLUMN11= MFCT3
COLUMN12= MFCT4

;Deviations from default settings

SHANK_END_CUTTER = 5=N
POINTED_DRILL = 4=ANGLE
LOCATOR = 3=EMPTY / ANGLE
3DCUTTER_110 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_111 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_121 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_155 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_156 = 5=N
3DCUTTER_157 = 5=N

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-146 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.10 Configuring the operator interface

8.10.3 Defining texts

You assign the texts (softkey name and customized list header, column header
and cursor texts of user-defined parameters) in a text file using special text
numbers.
The relevant syntax is:
[text number] 0 0 “[text]”
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.
The column header can comprise 3 lines, each line with its own text number
(see Table 8-10).

Table 8-10 Text assignment

Text type Text number

3rd horizontal softkey 89923
List header 89924
Column header parameter TPC1 89925, 89926, 89927
Cursor text parameter TPC1 89931
Column header parameter TPC2 89930, 89928, 89929
Cursor text parameter TPC2 89932
Column header parameter TPC3 89953, 89954, 89955
Cursor text parameter TPC3 89965
Column header parameter TPC4 89937, 89938, 89939
Cursor text parameter TPC4 89949
Column header parameter TPC5 89940, 89941, 89942
Cursor text parameter TPC5 89950
Column header parameter TPC6 89943, 89944, 89945
Cursor text parameter TPC6 89951
Column header parameter TPC7 89956, 89957, 89958
Cursor text parameter TPC7 89966
Column header parameter TPC8 89946, 89947, 89948
Cursor text parameter TPC8 89952
Column header parameter TPC9 89961, 89959, 89960
Cursor text parameter TPC9 89967
Column header parameter TPC10 89962, 89963, 89964
Cursor text parameter TPC10 89968

Example:
89924 0 0 “Tool data”
The maximum permissible number of characters for the different text types are
as follows:
Softkey: 9
Header list: 20
Column header parameter: 7
Cursor text parameter: 45

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-147
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.10 Configuring the operator interface

A line break in the softkey text can be made by inserting two consecutive
blanks.

Note
Some texts are already set to defaults which you can change.

PCU 20 For the PCU 20 enter the texts and numbers in text file ALUC.TXT.
A ALUC.TXT text file is stored in every language directory.

PCU 50 For the PCU 50 enter the texts and numbers in text file
F:\DH\CUS.DIR\ALUC_XX.COM. The file ALUC_XX.COM may have to be
created in the directory CUS.DIR.
The text language is assigned via the name of the text file. XX is replaced by
one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:

Table 8-11 Language assignment

Abbreviation Language
XX
gr German
uk English
fr French
it Italian
sp Spanish
nl Dutch
dk Danish
fi Finnish
sw Swedish
pl Polish
tr Turkish
ch Chinese,
simplified characters
tw Chinese,
traditional characters
ko Korean
hu Hungarian
po Brazilian
Portuguese
ru Russian
cz Czech
ja Japanese

Add the following line to the [TextFiles] section in the F:\USER\MBDDE.INI or

F:\OEM\MBDDE.INI file:
UserZYK=F:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-148 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.11 Import tool data

8.11 Import tool data

You can import tool data that you have measured on an external tool presetting
station directly into the tool management of ShopMill.
Store the tool data in an INI file.
The header in the file must be exactly as follows:
;TOOL MAGAZIN ZEROPOINT,TOOL=2,MAGAZIN=0,NPV=0,BNPV=0
However, you can change the values for “Tool” and “Magazine”.
Tool=1: Delete tools completely in the tool management
and replace them by new tools.
Tool=2: Add new tools of the tool management
Magazin=0: Do not evaluate magazine location number ($TC_MPP6)
Magazin=1: Do evaluate magazine location number ($TC_MPP6)

Note
Always keep to the precise order (including blanks) in the header. If you enter
an incorrect header line, the INI file will be evaluated as a G code program on
opening. Starting the program with “Cycle-Start” causes existing data in the tool
management to be overwritten by the data contained in the program.

The tool data must be assigned to the following variables in the INI file. In this
case:
x = Tool number
y = Cutting edge number

Table 8-12 Variable assignment

Variable Meaning Value

$TC_TP1[x] Duplo number Number
$TC_TP2[x] Tool name Name
$TC_TP3[x] Number of adjacent half-locations to Default for ShopMill
the left to be deactivated for oversize 1 = do not deactivate adjacent location
tools or
2 = deactivate half of left adjacent location
$TC_TP4[x] Number of adjacent half-locations to Default for ShopMill
the right to be deactivated for over- 1 = do not deactivate adjacent location
size tools or
2 = deactivate half of right adjacent location
$TC_TP5[x] Number of adjacent half-locations Default for ShopMill
above to be deactivated for oversize 1 = do not deactivate adjacent location
tools
$TC_TP6[x] Number of adjacent half-locations be- Default for ShopMill
low to be deactivated for oversize 1 = do not deactivate adjacent location
tools
$TC_TP7[x] Magazine location type Number

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-149
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.11 Import tool data

Table 8-12 Variable assignment

Variable Meaning Value

$TC_TP8[x] Tool status Bit 1 = 1: Tool enabled
Bit 2 = 1: Tool disabled
Bit 4 = 1: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 6 = 1: Tool fixed-location coded
$TC_TP9[x] Tool monitoring Bit 0 = 1: Tool life monitoring on
Bit 1 = 1: Workpiece monitoring on
$TC_TPC1[x] User-defined parameter 1
$TC_TPC2[x] User-defined parameter 2
$TC_TPC3[x] User-defined parameter 3
$TC_TPC4[x] User-defined parameter 4
$TC_TPC5[x] User-defined parameter 5
$TC_TPC6[x] User-defined parameter 6
$TC_TPC7[x] User-defined parameter 7
$TC_TPC8[x] User-defined parameter 8
$TC_TPC9[x] User-defined parameter 9
$TC_TPC10[x] User-defined parameter 10
$TC_DP1[x,y] Tool type 110: Cylindrical die milling cutter
111: Ball end mill
120: End mill
121: End mill with corner rounding
155: Bevel cutter
156: Bevel cutter with corner rounding
157: Conical die milling cutter
200: Spiral drill
220: Centering tool
710: 3D probe
711: Edge probe
$TC_DP3[x,y] Length Number [mm]
$TC_DP6[x,y] Radius Number [mm]
$TC_DP7[x,y] Rounding radius Number [degrees]
$TC_DP11[x,y] Angle for conical tools Number [degrees]
$TC_DP12[x,y] Wear length Number [mm]
$TC_DP15[x,y] Wear radius Number [mm]
$TC_DP24[x,1] Number of teeth (cutter) Number
or
$TC_DP24[x,y] Angle of tool tip (drill) Number [degrees]
$TC_DP25[x,1] Spindle rotation Bit 8 and bit 9 = 0: Spindle stop
Bit 8 = 1: Spindle clockwise
Bit 9 = 1: Spindle counterclockwise
Coolant Bit 10 = 1: Cooling water 1 on
Bit 11 = 1: Cooling water 2 on
M functions Bit 0 = 1: M function 1
Bit 1 = 1: M function 2
Bit 2 = 1: M function 3
Bit 3 = 1: M function 4
$TC_DPH[x,y] H number of an ISO dialect program Number
$TC_MOP1[x,y] Prewarning limit service life Number [min]
$TC_MOP2[x,y] Service life Number [min]
$TC_MOP3[x,y] Prewarning limit quantity Number

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-150 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 8 Tool Management
8.11 Import tool data

Table 8-12 Variable assignment

Variable Meaning Value

$TC_MOP4[x,y] Quantity Number
$TC_MPP6[n,m] Magazine location number n: Magazine number
m: Magazine location number

You must specify a hexadecimal value for bit-coded parameters.

The H number for ISO dialect programs will only be evaluated if ShopMill is set
up for ISO dialects (see Section 11.2 “ISO dialects”).
If you do not define parameters, the tool management will set them to zero later.
You must program the command “M30” at the end of the file.
Information about importing tool data into tool management start-up is given in:
References: /BAS/, ShopMill Operator’s Guide.

Example ;TOOL MAGAZIN ZEROPOINT,TOOL=2,MAGAZIN=0,NPV=0,BNPV=0

$TC_TP1[1]=1 ;Duplo number
$TC_TP2[1]=CUTTER ;Tool “cutter”
$TC_TP3[1]=1 ;Left adjacent location free
$TC_TP4[1]=1 ;Right adjacent location free
$TC_TP5[1]=1 ;Upper adjacent location free
$TC_TP6[1]=1 ;Lower adjacent location free
$TC_TP7[1]=1 ;Magazine location type
$TC_TP8[1]=2 ;Enable tool
$TC_TP9[1]=1 ;Tool life monitoring
$TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ;Tool type end mill
$TC_DP3[1,1]=120.41 ;Length
$TC_DP6[1,1]=5 ;Radius
$TC_DP24[1,1]=3 ;Number of teeth
...
M30 ;End of program
J

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 8-151
8 Tool Management 11.03
8.11 Import tool data

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

8-152 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Additional Functions 9
9.1 Measuring cycles
9.1.1 Brief description

Overview You can use measuring cycles for automatic measuring on vertical machining
centers and universal milling machines with ShopMill.
For this you need to connect a touch trigger probe to the control.

Measuring cycles The measuring cycles are shipped with ShopMill and contained in the ShopMill
toolbox.
You need to adapt the measuring cycle data to the actual conditions of the ma-
chine and make an initial assignment.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-153
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.1 Measuring cycles

9.1.2 Probe connection

Connection No more than two probes can be connected to the SINUMERIK 810D/840D/
840Di via the peripheral interface X121.

CCU

Probe

X121 Cable distributor

Fig. 9-1 Example: Probe connection to X121 on CCU module

I/O interface (X121) The probe is connected via a 37-pin D-Sub pin connector (X121).
The 24 V load power supply is also connected on this connector.

Table 9-1 Extract from PIN assignment table for X121 front connectors

PIN Designation
External power supply
1 M24EXT External ground
2 M24EXT External ground
... ... ...
Connection probe 1
9 MEPUS 0 Measuring pulse signal input
10 MEPUC 0 Measuring pulse common input
... ... ...
External power supply

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-154 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.1 Measuring cycles

Table 9-1 Extract from PIN assignment table for X121 front connectors

PIN Designation
20 P24EXT Current 24 V external
21 P24EXT Current 24 V external
... ... ...
Connection probe 2
28 MEPUS 1 Measuring pulse signal input
29 MEPUC 1 Measuring pulse common input
... ... ...

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-155
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.1 Measuring cycles

9.1.3 Functional check

Measuring command The measuring cycles operate internally with the MEAS command.
References: /PGA/, Programming Guide

PLC service dis- The functional test for the probe is conducted via a part program.
play
The measuring signal can be controlled after the end of the program via the
diagnostics menu “PLC status”.

Table 9-2 Status display for measuring signal

Status display

Probe 1 deflected DB 10 DB B107.0

Probe 2 deflected DB 10 DB B107.1

DB10-,...
DBX107.0 and 107.1 Probe activated
Data block Signal(s) from axis/spindle (drive_PLC)
Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of SW: 1.1
Signal state 1 or edge Probe 1 or 2 is activated.
change 0 –––> 1
Signal state 0 or edge Probe 1 or 2 is not activated.
change 1 –––> 0
References /PHD/, NCU 571-573 Manual
/PHF/, NCU 570 Manual
Note The above mentioned signal states correspond to the default setting (non-deflected 0V;
deflected 24V). Otherwise, the measurement input no. must be entered as a negative num-
ber.

Example of func- %_N_PRUEF_MESSTASTER_MPF

tional test ;$PATH=/_N_MPF_DIR
;Testing program probe connection
N05 DEF INT MTSIGNAL ;Flag for
;actuation state

N10 DEF INT ME_NR=1 ;Measuring input number

N20 DEF REAL MEASVAL_IN_X
N30 G17 T1 D1 ;Preset tool offset for
;probe
N40 _ANF: G0 G90 X0 F150 ;Start position and
;measuring velocity
N50 MEAS=ME_NR G1 X100 ;Measurement at measuring
;in the X axis
N60 STOPRE
N70 MTSIGNAL=$AC_MEA[1] ;Reading switching signal
;implemented in SW
;software at 1st measu-
;ring input

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-156 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.1 Measuring cycles

N80 IF MTSIGNAL == 0 GOTOF _FEHL1 ;Signal evaluation

N90 MESSWERT_IN_X=$AA_MW[X] ;Read measured value
;in workpiece coordinates
N95 M0
N100 M02
N110 _FEHL1: MSG (“Probe not switching!”)
N120 M0
N130 M02

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-157
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.1 Measuring cycles

9.1.4 Probe start-up

Start-up of
measuring cycles on Start
the control

Connect the signal lead

of the probe to the I/O interface X121
or X1 (according to the control type)

Check measuring
function using the
PRUEF_MESSTASTER
testing program

no
Single block ?

yes

no
Override to zero ?

yes

Load and preselect

PRUEF_MESSTASTER
program

2 1

Fig. 9-2 Start-up flowchart – part 1

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-158 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.1 Measuring cycles

2 1

NC START

no Is a measuring block with

MEAS present?
yes
Let NC block be
executed
Does the measuring
no
block disappear without
the probe being
deflected?
yes

There are pulses on the

measuring lead!
Cause:
Could be interference
Remedy:
Check probe connection
or measuring lead not
grounded

Override is zero,
Distance to go reached,
Activate probe manually

Measuring input 1: DB 10 DB B107.0

Measuring input 2: DB 10 DB B107.1

Fig. 9-3 Start-up flowchart – part 2

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-159
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.1 Measuring cycles

Does the bit change

no
2 with probe deflection
from “0” to “1”?
yes

Has the distance to

no go been deleted and
entered in MEAS-
VAL_IN_X?

yes
Contact service dept.

End

Fig. 9-4 Start-up flowchart – part 3

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-160 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.1 Measuring cycles

9.1.5 Machine data for measuring cycles

Machine data for

adapting the probe

13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [0]

MD number Switching performance of the probe at measuring input 1
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1

Change valid after POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: –

Data type: BOOLEAN Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Meaning: Value 0: (default setting)
non-deflected state 0V
deflected state 24 V
Value 1: non-deflected state 24 V
deflected state 0V

13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [1]

MD number Switching performance of the probe at measuring input 2
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1

Change valid after POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: –

Data type: BOOLEAN Valid as of software version:
840D SW 4.3, 810D SW 2.3
Meaning: Value 0: (default setting)
non-deflected state 0V
deflected state 24 V
Value 1: non-deflected state 24 V
deflected state 0V

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-161
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.1 Measuring cycles

9.1.6 Display machine data measuring cycles

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9749 CMM_ENABLE_MEAS_T_AUTO
MD number Enable automatic tool measurement

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 6.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD is used to enable the “automatic tool measurement” function on the user interface.
0 = “automatic tool measurement” function is not displayed

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 = “automatic tool measurement” function is displayed

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9750
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_MEAS_PROBE_INPUT

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Measuring input for a workpiece probe

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: BOOL Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD is used to define the measurement input for a workpiece probe.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0 = measurement input 1 is activated
1 = measurement input 2 is activated

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9751 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_MEAS_T_PROBE_INPUT

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Measuring input for tool probe
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: BOOL Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD is used to define the measurement input for a tool probe.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0 = measurement input 1 is activated
1 = measurement input 2 is activated

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9752
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE
Max. measuring distance for workpiece measurement in the program

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 5

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DOUBLE
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE
Min. input limit: 0.01
Protection level: 3/4
Max. input limit: 1000

Valid as of software version:

Unit: mm

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the maximum measurement path before and after the expected switching
position (workpiece edge) for “Tool measurement” in the program. If no switching signal is output

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
within the area, the error message “Probe does not switch” is output.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9753
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Max. measuring distance for workpiece measurement in manual

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 10

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Min. input limit: 0.01 Max. input limit: 1000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the maximum measurement path before and after the expected switching
position (workpiece edge) for “Tool measurement” in manual mode. If no switching signal is output
within the area, the error message “Probe does not switch” is output.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-162 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.1 Measuring cycles

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9754 CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH
MD number Max. measuring distance tool length rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 2 Min. input limit: 0.001 Max. input limit: 1000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the maximum measurement path before and after the expected switching
position (tool length) for measuring the tool length of a rotating spindle. If no switching signal is

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
output within the area, the error message “Probe does not switch” is output.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9755
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Max. measuring distance tool radius rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0.001 Max. input limit: 1000
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the maximum measurement path before and after the expected switching

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
position (tool radius) for measuring the tool radius of a rotating spindle. If no switching signal is
output within the area, the error message “Probe does not switch” is output.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9756 CMM_MEASURING_FEED

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Measuring feed workpiece measurement
Default setting: 300 Min. input limit: 10 Max. input limit: 5000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁIMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
This MD is used to define the measurement feed for “Workpiece measurement”.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9757 CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL
MD number Feed in the plane with collision monitoring

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 1000 Min. input limit: 10 Max. input limit: 5000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: To protect the probe, intermediate positions are approached with this feed in the plane as
measuring blocks to monitor for collisions. This feed must be selected such that the maximum

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
deflection of the probe is not exceeded should a collision occur.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9758
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Infeed with collision monitoring

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 1000 Min. input limit: 10 Max. input limit: 5000
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: To protect the probe, intermediate positions are approached with this feed in the tool axis as

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
measuring blocks to monitor for collisions. This feed must be selected such that the maximum
deflection of the probe is not exceeded should a collision occur.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-163
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.1 Measuring cycles

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9759 CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP
MD number Max. circum. veloc. tool measurement rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 100 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 200

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: m/min
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the maximum circumferential speed of the tools to be measured for tool
measurement with rotating spindle. The permissible spindle speed for carrying out the tool

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
measurement is calculated according to the MD.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9760
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_MAX_SPIND_SPEED_ROT_SP

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Max. speed tool measurement rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 1000 Min. input limit: 100 Max. input limit: 25000
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: rpm

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DOUBLE
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the maximum speed of rotation of the tools to be measured for tool measurement

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
with rotating spindle.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9761
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Min. feedrate tool measurement rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 10 Min. input limit: 0.01 Max. input limit: 1000
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DOUBLE
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the minimum feedrate for tool measurement with a rotating spindle. Tools which

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
have a very large radius and require high precision would otherwise have a very small feed.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9762 CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP
MD number Meas. precision tool measurement rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0.01 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3
Meaning: This MD defines the desired measurement precision for tool measurement with a rotating spindle.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9763 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_TOOL_PROBE_TYPE

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Type of tool probe
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 999

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD is used to define the type of tool probe.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0 = measuring cube
101 = meas. disk in XY (1st and 2nd geometry axis)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
201 = meas. disk in ZX (3rd and 1st geometry axis)
301 = meas. disk in YZ (2nd and 3rd geometry axis)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-164 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.1 Measuring cycles

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9764 CMM_TOOL_PROBE_ALLOW_AXIS
MD number Perm. axis directions tool probe

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 133 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 333

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the permissible axes and the axis directions in which measurements can be
taken at the tool probe.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The number to be specified is made up of ZYX. The following attributes can be specified for each

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
axis:
0 = not possible

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 = only in minus direction

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 = only in plus direction
3 = in both directions

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Sample application: Default setting 133 means

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1st number (1): Measuring in Z possible minus direction only
2nd number (3): Measuring in Y possible in both directions

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3rd number (3): Measuring in X possible in both directions

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9765
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEA

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Diam. tool probe length measurement

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the active diameter or the active edge of the tool probe for measurement of the
tool length.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9766 CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS
MD number Diam. tool probe radius measurement

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the active diameter or the active edge of the tool probe for measurement of the
tool radius.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9767
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS
Dist. tool probe top edge radius measurement

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the distance between the upper edge of the tool probe and the lower edge of the
tool for radius measurement.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-165
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.1 Measuring cycles

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9768 CMM_T_PROBE_APPROACH_DIR
MD number Plane approach direction, tool probe

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: –1 Min. input limit: –2 Max. input limit: 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 4.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the direction of an approach in the plane which the tool takes to the tool probe.
–1 = 1st plane axis in minus direction

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+1 = 1st plane axis in plus direction
–2 = 2nd plane axis in plus direction

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
+2 = 2nd plane axis in plus direction

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9769 CMM_FEED_FACTOR_1_ROT_SP
MD number Feed factor 1 tool measurement rot. sp

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 6.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD specifies the feed factor for the 1st measuring operation for tool measurement with
rotating spindle.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0: Measurement performed once

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
>0: 1st measurement multiplied by feed factor 1
2nd measuring operation with measuring feedrate

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9770 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_FEED_FACTOR_2_ROT_SP

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Feed factor 2 tool measurement rot. sp

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 50
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: This MD specifies the feed factor for the 2nd measuring operation for tool measurement with

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
rotating spindle. This factor is only active if MD 9769 CMM_FEED_FACTOR_1_ROT_SP > 0.
This feed factor must be smaller than the feed factor in MD 9769

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_FEED_FACTOR_1_ROT_SP.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0: Measurement performed twice

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
>0: 1st measurement multiplied by feed factor 1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2nd measurement multiplied by feed factor 2
3rd measuring operation with measuring feedrate

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9771 CMM_MAX_FEED_ROT_SP
MD number Max. feedrate tool measurement rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 20 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 1000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: This MD defines the maximum feedrate for tool measurement with a rotating spindle.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-166 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.1 Measuring cycles

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9772 CMM_T_PROBE_MEASURING_DIST
MD number Measuring distance tool measurement non-rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 5 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 1000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 6.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the measuring distance for tool measurement and calibration of the tool probe
with a non-rotating spindle.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9773 CMM_T_PROBE_MEASURING_FEED
MD number Feedrate tool measurement non-rot. spindle

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 300 Min. input limit: 10 Max. input limit: 5000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min
Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 6.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD defines the feedrate for tool measurement and calibration of the tool probe with a
non-rotating spindle.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9774
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER
Tool probe manufacturer

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:
ShopMill 6.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: This MD is used to define the manufacturer of tool probe.
0 = no data

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 = Heidenhain
2 = Renishaw

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9775 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CMM_T_PROBE_OFFSET

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MD number Offset in tool measurement rot. sp

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 2
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 6.3
Meaning: This MD defines an offset for the measured tool length or the measured tool radius for tool

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
measurement with a rotating spindle. Offsetting the measurement result may be necessary if the
probe is switched slightly too early by the pulse of the rotating spindle.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0 = no offset

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1 = automatic offset (internal offset for Heidenhain and Renishaw probes)
2 = offset via user-defined offset data (see /BNM/, User Manual Measuring Cycles, _MT_EC_R

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
and _MT_EC_L)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
(The user-defined offset is also possible if MD 9774 CMM_T_PROBE_MANUFACTURER = 1
or 2)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-167
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.1 Measuring cycles

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9776 CMM_MEAS_SETTINGS
MD number Settings for measuring cycles

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: – Max. input limit: –

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: –
Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ShopMill 6.3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Meaning: Bit 0 = 0: For workpiece measurement, the probe is rotated to a defined starting position in the
measuring cycles. (The starting position automatically results from the position of the coordinate

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
system and the position of the measuring point on the probe.)
Bit 0 =1: During workpiece measurement, the current spindle position is taken as the starting

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
position for the measuring cycles.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-168 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.2 Network link

9.2 Network link

9.2.1 General description

Option The “Manage Network/Diskette Drive” function is an option available under or-
der number 6FC5 463-0FA03-0AA0.

Function ShopMill can set up a network drive management function in the Program Man-
ager operating area. You can use it to display directories and files

S that are on an internal drive, e.g. a diskette drive, or

S that are on an external drive (network link).

Note
Note that the directories of external drives can only be linked if they are avail-
able.

A maximum of 5 softkeys are provided for this purpose on the horizontal softkey
menu in the Program Manager operating area. Softkey “NC” (1st horizontal soft-
key) is configured permanently and is used to display the directories and files
on the NC and the data management directory on the hard disk. The other 4
softkeys (horizontal softkeys 2 to 5) can be freely configured.

Note
If the directories “part programs” and “subroutines” are enabled in the program
manager (MD 9719 $MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK), the 4 freely configurable
softkeys are shifted to horizontal softkeys 4 to 7.

To install the network, please see

References: /IAM/, IM2, Installation and Start-up of HMI Embedded
IM4, Installation and Start-up of HMI Advanced

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-169
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.2 Network link

9.2.2 Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill (PCU 20)

Proceed as follows to link the Windows network drives:

Switch to the CNC-ISO user interface and select menu “Start-up” → “Logical
drives” → “Links”.
In the first line of the “Network links” window, enter the drive path and softkey
text for the 2nd horizontal softkey in the ShopMill program manager. The entries
for the remaining softkeys are made in the lower lines.

Enter drive paths Enter the drive path in the left input field.
For internal drives, you will have to enter the drive letter and, if required, the
path.
Example: A:\SM
For external drives (network links), you will have to specify the complete net-
work path (\\computer_name\share_name\pathname), the pathname being op-
tional.
Example: \\R4711\Werkstuecke\Muster
The directories (Werkstuecke and Muster) must be present on the network com-
puter (R4711).

Define softkey Enter the softkey labels in the window in the right “Network links”. There is a
texts separate input field for each line of the softkey.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-170 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.2 Network link

9.2.3 Linking Windows network drives to ShopMill (PCU 50)

Proceed as follows to link the Windows network drives:

Define softkey Enter in text file F:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_xx.com the drive names for the 2nd to 5th
texts softkeys of the horizontal softkey menu. The file “aluc_xx.com” may have to be
created in the directory “cus.dir”.
The relevant syntax is:
Text number 0 0 “softkey text”
The softkeys are assigned to the following text numbers in the file
“aluc_xx.com”:
Softkey 2: 89901
Softkey 3: 89902
Softkey 4: 89903
Softkey 5: 89904
The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text
output and must always be set to 0.

Note
A line break in the softkey text can be made by inserting two consecutive
blanks. You can use up to 9 characters per line.

The text language is assigned via the name of the text file. “xx” is replaced by
one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:

Table 9-3 Language assignment

Abbreviation Language
xx
gr German
uk English
fr French
it Italian
sp Spanish
nl Dutch
dk Danish
fi Finnish
sw Swedish
pl Polish
tr Turkish
ch Chinese,
simplified characters
tw Chinese,
traditional characters
ko Korean
hu Hungarian

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-171
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.2 Network link

Table 9-3 Language assignment

Abbreviation Language
xx
po Brazilian
Portuguese
ru Russian
cz Czech
ja Japanese

Add the following line to the [TextFiles] section in the F:\USER\MBDDE.INI or

F:\OEM\MBDDE.INI file:
UserZYK=F:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_

The file MBDDE.INI may have to be created in the stated directory.

Example In the Program Manager of ShopMill, the 2nd horizontal softkey must be as-
signed the name “NETZ1” in German.
The following entry must be made in text file “aluc_gr.com”:
89901 0 0 “NETZ1”

Enter the drive Enter the drive path of the relevant softkey in display MD 9676 to 9679.
paths
The following display machine data are available:
Softkey2: MD 9676 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1
Softkey3: MD 9677 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2
Softkey4: MD 9678 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3
Softkey5: MD 9679 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4
The display machine data are described in Chapter 6 “Machine Data”.
For internal drives, you will have to enter the drive letter and, if required, the
path.
For external drives (network links), you will have to specify the complete net-
work path (\\computer_name\share_name\pathname), the pathname being op-
tional.

Example Via the 2nd horizontal softkey with the name “NETZ1”, directory Werk-
stuecke\Muster stored on server R4711 must be displayed.
The following must then be entered in MD 9676: \\R4711\Werkstuecke\Muster
Via the 3rd horizontal softkey, the directory SM must be displayed on the dis-
kette drive.
The following must then be entered in MD 9677: A:\SM

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-172 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.3 Cylinder surface transformation

9.3 Cylinder surface transformation

9.3.1 Function

Option The cylinder surface transformation function can be used only if “Tracyl” (op-
tional) has been set as a standard function.
The order no. is: 6FC5 251-0AB01-0AA0.

General The cylinder surface transformation is required in order to machine the following
on cylindrical bodies:

S Longitudinal grooves,
S Transverse grooves,
S Any type of groove contour.
The groove contour is programmed in relation to the developed, plane surface
of the cylinder. The program can include line/circle, drilling or milling cycles or
profiling (free contour programming).
There are two variants of cylinder surface transformation:

S With groove wall offset (ON)

S Without groove wall offset (OFF)

ÉÉ
ÉÉ É É
ÉÉ
ÉÉ ËËË ËËË É É
ÉÉ
ÉÉ ËËË ËËË ÉÉ
ËËË
Longitudinal groove Transverse groove Longitudinal groove with par-
Without groove wall offset allel limitation and groove wall
offset

Fig. 9-5 Grooves with and without groove wall offset

Enable cylinder The “Enable cylinder surface transformation” function is displayed on the Shop-
surface trans- Mill operator interface when display MD 9721 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL
formation is set to 1. The rotary axis involved in the cylinder surface transformation is dis-
played and programmed via display MD 9653 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS or
9720 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS.
The cylinder surface transformation function is selected and deselected via soft-
key “Miscellaneous”, “Transformations”, “Cylinder surface” on the ShopMill Op-
erator interface and is described in:
References: /BAS/, ShopMill Operation/Programming

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-173
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.3 Cylinder surface transformation

9.3.2 Example of how to set an axis configuration

Example The following example illustrates how to set the axis configuration on a ma-
chine.

A
È
Y

Key:

X Axis is parallel to rotary axis

Y Supplementary axis
Z Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis
A Rotary axis
C Workspindle

Fig. 9-6 Groove machining on cylinder surface with X-C-Z kinematics

You must configure 2 data blocks with the following machine data for the ma-
chine illustrated above:
20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4]=5
Number of channel axes
20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0]=“XC”
Channel axis XC
20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[1]=“YC”
Channel axis YC
20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[2]=“ZC”
Channel axis ZC
20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[3]=“A”
Channel axis A
20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[4]=“C”
Channel axis C

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-174 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.3 Cylinder surface transformation

1st data block for cylinder surface transformation without groove wall offset:
24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=512
Definition of 1st transformation in cylinder surface channel
24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[0]=3
Channel axis of radial rotary axis (Z) for 1st transformation
24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1]=4
Channel axis of rotary axis for 1st transformation
24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[2]=1
Channel axis of parallel rotary axis (X) for 1st transformation
24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[3]=2
Channel axis of special axis index [0] for 1st transformation
24120 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[0]=1
1st channel axis (X) for 1st transformation
24120 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[1]=4
2nd channel axis (Y) for 1st transformation
24120 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[2]=3
3rd channel axis (Z) for 1st transformation
24800 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1=0
Offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation
24810 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1=1
Sign of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation
24820 $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1[n]=0
Vector of basic tool for 1st TRACYL transformation
2nd data block for cylinder surface transformation with groove wall offset:
24200 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2=513
Definition of 2nd transformation in cylinder surface channel with
groove wall offset
24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[0]=3
Channel axis of radial rotary axis (Z) for 2nd transformation
24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[1]=4
Channel axis of rotary axis for 2nd transformation
24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[2]=1
Channel axis of parallel rotary axis (X) for 2nd transformation
24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[3]=2
Channel axis of special axis index [0] for 2nd transformation
24220 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[0]=1
1st channel axis (X) for 2nd transformation
24220 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[1]=4
2nd channel axis (Y) for 2nd transformation
24220 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[2]=3
3rd channel axis (Z) for 2nd transformation
24850 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2=0
Offset of rotary axis for 2nd TRACYL transformation
24860 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2=1
Sign of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL transformation
24870 $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL[n]=0
Vector of basic tool for 2nd TRACYL transformation

Note
MD 24100 must always be set to 512 in the 1st data set and MD 24200 to 513
in the 2nd data set.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-175
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.4 Swivel heads and tables

9.4 Swivel heads and tables

Swivel heads and tables are employed to create or machine oblique surfaces.
Display MD 9723 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELLING_HEAD is set to enable
the swiveling function.
You must set up a swivel data set for every swivel head, swivel table or com-
bination of both.
You can define swivel data sets using softkey “Swivel cycle” in the “Start-up”
operating area on the CNC-ISO operator interface.
User-specific adjustment to the swivel function can be made in the TOOLCARR
swivel cycle.
You will find a detailed description of start-up (defining swivel data sets and the
TOOLCARR swivel cycle) in:
References: /PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles

Alarms When the swivel head/table is set manually, alarms displaying the required
angle are output:
62180 Set both axes manually
62181 Set one axis manually
With a Hirth tooth system, the corresponding rotary axes can only assume cer-
tain positions (angle grid > 0). If the programming demands a position that devi-
ates from the angle grid, the machine automatically sets the next closest posi-
tion and outputs an alarm.
112328 Angle adjusted to angle grid
How the alarm must be acknowledged can be set in swivel cycle TOOLCARR.
An alarm is output if the swivel head/table must be set to an angle outside the
permissible angular range in order to machine the workpiece:
61184 Machining not possible with current angle values
The programmed machining operation cannot be performed with the existing
swivel head/table.
ShopMill generates one of the following alarms when you manually load/unload
or replace swivel heads:
112323 Unload swivel head
112324 Load swivel head
112325 Replace swivel head
When swivel heads are loaded/unloaded or replaced, the swivel head cycle
TOOLCARR is also called.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-176 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.5 Multiple clamping

9.5 Multiple clamping

The “Multiple clamping” function optimizes tool changes over several workpiece
clampings. On the one hand, this reduces downtimes and, on the other, elimi-
nates tool change times because a tool performs as many machining opera-
tions as possible in all clampings before the next tool change is initiated.
You can either execute the same program several times in the clampings or you
can select different programs.
The “Multiple clamping with different programs” is a software option with order
no. 6FC5 463-0FA04-0AA0.
If you are using fixture plates on your machine, you do not have to set up any-
thing else.
In the case of rotating clamping devices, on the other hand, you must adapt a
cycle to match the features of the fixture plate so as to ensure that the next
workpiece can be turned to the correct position after a workpiece has been ma-
chined (or if several fixture plates are used also while the current workpiece is
being machined).
Please proceed as follows:

S Change the cycle CLAMP.SPF that is stored on the toolbox under

tools\cycles\d.

S Copy the cycle into the directory user or manufacturer cycles.

Example

Y
Clamping 1

Clamping 4 Clamping 2
Rotary axis A

Clamping 3

Machine table

Fig. 9-7 Rotating fixture plate (indexing fixture)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-177
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.5 Multiple clamping

In the example, a rotating fixture plate (indexing fixture) is 4 clamping positions

is used. Each clamping position can be machined by rotating rotary axis A.
Clamping 1: A = 0°
Clamping 2: A = 90°
Clamping 3: A = 180°
Clamping 4: A = 270°
You must then adjust the CLAMP.SPF cycles as follows:
...
DEF INT _NV ; Aux. variable
;––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
;Adjustment
;
IF _ACT==1
G0 A=DC(0)
ENDIF
;
IF _ACT==2
G0 A=DC(90)
ENDIF
;
IF _ACT==3
G0 A=DC(180)
ENDIF
;
IF _ACT==4
G0 A=DC(270)
ENDIF
;
;––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
_NV=_NPV+_ACT ; calculation of current zero offset
N10 G[8]=_NV ; there must be no calculation here
RET

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-178 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 9 Additional Functions
9.6 Measuring cycle support in the G code editor

9.6 Measuring cycle support in the G code editor

In ShopMill, you can incorporate screenforms in the G code editor which sup-
port you when programming measuring cycles. These cycles can then also be
recompiled automatically.
The function “measuring cycles” is a software option with the order no.
6FC5 250–0BX00–0AB0.
To perform the startup, please proceed as follows:

PCU 20
S Load the file TOOLS\DISK01\CYCLES\COMMON.COM into the NC. The file
is stored automatically in the directory USER CYCLES.

S In the file USER CYCLES\COMMON.COM, remove the semicolon “;” follo-

wed by the line:
;sc8407=aeditor.com ;Milling measuring cycles (horizontal softkey 7
;on the extended softkey bar in the
;G code editor)
As a result, a link is established between the softkey used to call up the
measuring cycle support and the configuring file of this supporting screen-
form.

S In the file USER CYCLES\COMMON.COM, remove the semicolon “;” follo-

wed by the line:
;sc617=startup.com ;Startup operating area (horizontal
;Softkey 7 on the extended softkey bar)
This enables you to change the properties of the measuring cycle support in
the Startup operating area.

S Restart the PCU 20.

S Change, if required, the properties of the measuring cycle support in the
menu “Startup” → “>” → “Measuring cycles”.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 9-179
9 Additional Functions 11.03
9.6 Measuring cycle support in the G code editor

PCU 50 Prerequisite:
When starting up HMI Advanced, the files AEDITOR.COM and STARTUP.COM
have been stored automatically in the directory STANDARD CYCLES
(CST.DIR).
When starting up ShopMill, the archive SM_CYC.ARC was loaded from the
PCU 50 into the NC. In doing so, the file COMMON.COM was automatically
stored in the directory USER CYCLES (CUS.DIR).

S In the file USER CYCLES\AEDITOR.COM, remove the semicolon “;” follo-

wed by the line:
;sc8407=aeditor.com ;Milling measuring cycles (horizontal Softkey 7
;on the extended softkey bar in the
;G code editor)

In the file STANDARD CYCLES\AEDITOR.COM, remove the semicolon “;”

followed by the lines:
;HS15=($83531,,se1)
;PRESS(HS15)
; LS(”F_mess”,”MZ_SKL.COM”,1)
;END_PRESS

As a result, a link is established between the softkey used to call up the

measuring cycle support and the configuring file of this supporting screen-
form.

S
;HS15=($83070,,se1)
;PRESS(HS15)
; LS(”Messz”)
;END_PRESS
As a result, you can change the properties of the measuring cycle support in
the Startup operating area.

S Restart the PCU 50.

S Change, if required, the properties of the measuring cycle support in the
menu “Startup” → “>” → “Measuring cycles”.
J

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

9-180 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Customer-Specific Operator Interface 10
10.1 Configuring the customer booting display

10.1.1 PCU 20

You can create your own customer display (company logo, etc.) which will be
displayed when the control system is being booted.
Please proceed as follows to configure the customer boot screen:
1. Create your own boot screen in 16-color mode. The maximum screen size is
224x224 pixels for the OP010/OP010C/OP010S/OP012 and 352x352 pixels
for the OP015.
2. Save the boot screen in bitmap format under the name CUSTOM.BMP.
3. Run file app_inst.exe (see Subsection 4.2.2 “Installing ShopMill on a
PCU 20”).
4. Select <2> “Modify configuration”.
5. Select <6> “Add user specific files to the application”.
6. Enter the path of file CUSTOM.BMP.
Your customized boot screen is added to the application software.
7. Return to the main menu with Esc.
8. Finish installing the software on the PC card (see Subsection 4.2.2 “Instal-
ling ShopMill on a PCU 20”).
9. Load the PC card into the PCU 20 (see Subsection 4.2.2 “Installing ShopMill
on a PCU 20”).
10. Set MD 9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE to the value 1.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 10-181
10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface 11.03
10.1 Configuring the customer booting display

10.1.2 PCU 50

You can create your own customer display (company logo, etc.) which will be
displayed when the control system is being booted.
Please proceed as follows to configure the customer boot screen:
1. Create your own boot screen in 16-color mode. The maximum screen size is
224x224 pixels for the OP010/OP010C/OP010S/OP012 and 352x352 pixels
for the OP015.
2. Save the boot screen in bitmap format under the name CUSTOM.BMP.
3. Copy the file CUSTOM.BMP to directory F:\DH\CUS.DIR\HLP.DIR.
4. Set MD 9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE to the value 1.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

10-182 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface
10.2 Configuring the user screen form

10.2 Configuring the user screen form

Using the “Expand the Operator Interface” tools, you can create your own user
screen forms representing specific functional expansions (e.g. your own cycles
and measuring cycles) or simply create your own screen form layout (static
screen forms).
References: /IAM/, HMI Installation and Start-Up Guide, BE1 Expand the
Operator Interface

Entry softkeys The user-configured static screen forms can be displayed with the following
entry softkeys, the SC number being the link between the entry softkey and the
configuration file of the screen form:

Table 10-1 Entry softkeys for screen forms

Exit screen form Softkey SCxxxx

Manual operating mode Horizontal softkey 8 SC818

Automatic mode Horizontal softkey 6 SC826

Messages/Alarms operating area Horizontal softkey 7 SC857

Messages/Alarms operating area Horizontal softkey 8 SC858

Tools/Zero Offsets operating area Horizontal softkey 7 SC867

Note
In manual mode you can also assign a user cycle to horizontal softkey 8. The
NC code generated is then collected and you can then start the cycle with
“Cycle Start”.

You can call your own cycles by means of the following access softkeys:

Table 10-2 Entry softkeys for cycles

Exit screen form Softkey SCxxxx

Program operating area – Drilling Vertical softkey 6 SC8426

Program operating area – Milling Vertical softkey 6 SC8436

Program operating area – Miscellaneous Vertical softkey 4 SC8454

You can use the following entry softkeys to reveal your own measuring cycles,
which are to replace the ShopMill measuring cycles:

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 10-183
10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface 11.03
10.2 Configuring the user screen form

Table 10-3 Entry softkeys for measuring cycles

Exit screen form Softkey SCxxxx

Operating mode Manual – Workpiece zero Vertical softkey 1 SC8131

Operating mode Manual – Workpiece zero Vertical softkey 2 SC8132

Operating mode Manual – Workpiece zero Vertical softkey 3 SC8133

Operating mode Manual – Workpiece zero Vertical softkey 4 SC8134

Operating mode Manual – Workpiece zero Vertical softkey 5 SC8135

Operating mode Manual – Workpiece zero Vertical softkey 6 SC8136

Operating mode Manual – Workpiece zero Vertical softkey 7 SC8137

Operating mode Manual – Tool measurement Vertical softkey 1 SC8141

Operating mode Manual – Tool measurement Vertical softkey 2 SC8142

Operating mode Manual – Tool measurement Vertical softkey 3 SC8143

Operating mode Manual – Tool measurement Vertical softkey 4 SC8144

Operating mode Manual – Tool measurement Vertical softkey 5 SC8145

Operating mode Manual – Tool measurement Vertical softkey 6 SC8146

Operating mode Manual – Tool measurement Vertical softkey 7 SC8147

Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 1 SC8951

Workpiece zero
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 2 SC8952
Workpiece zero
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 3 SC8953
Workpiece zero
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 4 SC8954
Workpiece zero
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 5 SC8955
Workpiece zero
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 6 SC8956
Workpiece zero
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 7 SC8957
Workpiece zero
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 1 SC8961
Tool measurement
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 2 SC8962
Tool measurement
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 3 SC8963
Tool measurement
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 4 SC8964
Tool measurement
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 5 SC8965
Tool measurement
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 6 SC8966
Tool measurement
Operating area Program – Miscellaneous – Vertical softkey 7 SC8967
Tool measurement

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

10-184 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface
10.2 Configuring the user screen form

10.2.1 Transferring cycles to the machining plan

You can transfer all user cycles that you have inserted in the operating area
program (including measuring cycles) to the machining plan and edit them
there. However, the cycles will not be displayed as programming graphics.
Define the cycle using “Add operator interface”. Please note that the cycle must
contain the function Generate Code (GC) and an OUTPUT method for NC code
to be generated and sent to the NC for execution.
If you call up and take over the cycle on the ShopMill user interface, the cycle
will automatically appear in the machining plan. The screen form name of the
cycle will appear in the machining plan as plain text.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 10-185
10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface 11.03
10.2 Configuring the user screen form

10.2.2 Linking cycles into the machining plan

You can link user cycles into the machining plan with the ShopMill cycles
“Positions”.

Name The name of the cycles that you want to link into the machining plan, must be
exactly as follows:
E_DR_OX with X = 1 to 9

Variables You must configure the following variables in the cycles:

You must first define three variables which are not assigned until the program
step is inserted in the machining plan, i.e. the attribute must be assigned invisi-
bly (wr0) to the input field of each variable. The variable sequence is as follows:
1. Variable for the next tool, data type String (S)
2. Variable for the position identifier in objects, data type Integer
3. Variable for the sequencer text to be displayed later in the ShopMill machin-
ing plan, data type String (S)
A value is best assigned to this variable in a LOAD method.
Two variables for cycles processing must also be defined as well as one vari-
able for each toggle field which has a different display content on the interface
(e.g. mm/rev) than the internally transferred quantity (e.g. 1).
These variables do not have their own input field, i.e. the attribute must also be
assigned invisibly (wr0). The placement of the variables is optional.

Note
When an OUTPUT method is used, all variables described above must be con-
figured within this method so that they can all be interpreted on recompilation.

Example In the toolbox, you will find an example cycle E_DR_O1.SPF in directory
TOOLS\CYCLES\X\OEM_1. The associated operator interface is configured in
file E_DR_O1.COM. The German and English texts are stored in files
E_DR_TXD.COM and E_DR_TXE.COM respectively. The example also in-
cludes a few further auxiliary images.
For information about installing the cycle, please refer to file README.TXT.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

10-186 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface
10.2 Configuring the user screen form

10.2.3 Linking measuring cycles

Operating mode If you want to link user measuring cycles in operating mode Manual, the vertical
Manual softkey 8 (VS8) in the new cycle screen form will have a special meaning. All
actions that the new measuring cycle are to perform when the “Cycle start” key
is pressed must be defined in a PRESS method for VSK8. If the “Cycle start”
key is pressed, NC code is generated, and written to a program where it is pro-
cessed; i.e. the function Generate Code (GC) must be programmed in the
PRESS method for VSK8 if necessary. This, in turn means that an OUTPUT
method must be defined.

Note
The VSK8 does not need to be pressed by the operator but is triggered inter-
nally when the “Cycle start” key is pressed. It should therefore not be labeled.

Example In the toolbox you will find the archive file E_MS_O1.ARC, containing the exam-
ple measuring cycle E_MS_O1.SPF in directory TOOLS\CYCLES\X\
OEM_MEAS. The associated operator interface is configured in file
E_DR_O1.COM. The German and English texts are stored in files
E_MS_TXD.COM and E_MS_TXE.COM, and in EDGE_Z.BMP an auxiliary
display.
For information about installing the cycle, please refer to file README.TXT.

Operating area If you want to link user measuring cycles into the operating area program, pro-
Program ceed as described in Subsection 10.2.1 “Transferring cycles to the machining
plan”.
A vertical softkey menu will then be created behind the entry softkey “Miscella-
neous” → “Workpiece zero”, via which you can call up your measuring cycles.
Such a vertical softkey menu already exists behind the entry softkey “Miscella-
neous” → “Measure tool”.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 10-187
10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface 11.03
10.3 ShopMill Open (PCU 50)

10.3 ShopMill Open (PCU 50)

The difference between ShopMill Open and ShopMill Classic is that the Open
variant has a basic menu bar or extended basic menu bar. It is not possible to
change to the CNC ISO operator interface in ShopMill Open, but the HMI Ad-
vanced operating areas “Parameters” (without tool management and zero off-
sets), “Services”, “Diagnosis”, and “Start-Up” are directly accessible via the ex-
tended horizontal softkey menu.
For start-up and diagnostic purposes, the extended horizontal softkey menu
also contains the softkeys “Machine Service” and “Exit”. The two softkeys are
only visible with protection level 1.
Furthermore, you can integrate Windows applications via softkeys in the basic
menu bar in ShopMill Open.
You must install these Windows applications in the “OEM” directory and define
them in file REGIE.INI. This does not apply to Siemens additional products. You
must install those in directory ADD_ON. See the ShopMill CD-ROM:
References: User’s Guide HMI Programming Package Part 1 (BN)

10.3.1 Basic menu bar

Jump into applica- There are various ways of integrating Windows applications into the basic menu
tion bar:

S Horizontal softkey 4, i.e. the Messages/Alarms operating area is replaced

S User-assignable softkeys 7 and 8
S User-assignable softkeys 1 to 8 in the extended horizontal softkey menu

Return jump from There are 3 ways of jumping from the Windows application to another operating
application area:

S Using the “Menu Select” key on the operator panel, you can return to the
basic menu bar and then select another operating area via a softkey.

S You can configure the keys “Position”, “Program”, “Offset”, “Program Man-
ager”, “Alarm”, and “Custom” on the operator panel to branch directly into
another operating area or sub-menu.

S You can configure so-called “PLC keys” to branch into another operating
area or sub-menu.
References: /IAM/, Installation & Start-Up Guide HMI, Expand the Operator
Interface (BE1)
Keywords “OP Hotkeys” and “PLC Keys”

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

10-188 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface
10.4 User status display (PCU 50)

10.4 User status display (PCU 50)

Machine states controlled via the PLC can be displayed as user symbols in the
program status line.

Program status line

Fig. 10-1 Program status line

You must activate display of these user symbols in display MD 9052

SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE.
The program path of the currently selected program is then displayed with the
program name in the line below.
16 display positions are defined in the program status line.

User symbols User symbols must meet the following requirements:

S Colors: 16-color mode

S Size: OP010/OP010C/OP010S: 16 x 16 pixels
OP012: 20 x 20 pixels
OP015: 27 x 26 pixels (height x width)

S File name: 8 characters

S Format: BMP
Place the user symbols in directory F:\DH\CUS.DIR\HLP.DIR.

HEADER.INI Enter the names of the user symbols and the signal for controlling the symbol
selection in section UserIcons of file HEADER.INI.

Note
If you have already made these entries for HMI Advanced, you do not have to
repeat the entries for ShopMill.

[UserIcons]
UI_0= <Ikone_00.bmp>, <Position>
UI_0: Identifier
Ikone_00.bmp: Name of user symbol
Position: Display position (1 to 16)
...
UI_31= <Ikone_31.bmp>, <Position>

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 10-189
10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface 11.03
10.4 User status display (PCU 50)

USER_ICON_BASE = DBx.DBBy
DBx.DBBy: User-defined signal for control of
symbol selection
You will find file HEADER.INI in directory F:\HMI_ADV and must copy them ei-
ther to directory F:\OEM or F:\USER.
User symbols are each addressed by one bit, i.e. if bit n is set in signal
DBx.DBBy, the user symbol is displayed with identifier UI_n.
If the bit is reset by the PLC, the associated user symbol is removed from the
program status display.
If several user symbols are assigned to the same position, the user symbol with
the highest identifier number is displayed.
Empty positions need not be specified.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

10-190 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface
10.5 OP hotkeys, PLC keys

10.5 OP hotkeys, PLC keys

OP hotkeys You can configure the keys “Position”, “Program”, “Offset”, “Program Manager”,
“Alarm”, and “Custom” on the operator panel to branch to an operating area of
your choice.

PLC keys You can configure so-called “PLC keys” to branch to particular operating areas.

Configuration With the OP hotkeys or PLC keys you can switch between the following operat-
ing areas:

S PCU 20
From ShopMill to any operating area of ShopMill.

S PCU 50
From ShopMill to any operating area of ShopMill.
From ShopMill to any operating area of HMI Advanced and vice versa.
For information about configuring, please see:
References: /IAM/, Installation & Start-Up Guide HMI, Expand the Operator
Interface (BE1)
Keywords “OP Hotkeys” and “PLC Keys”

Note
The “PLC keys” in ShopMill are configured in the KEYS.INI file, not via interface
DB 19.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 10-191
10 Customer-Specific Operator Interface 11.03
10.5 OP hotkeys, PLC keys

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

10-192 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Miscellaneous 11
11.1 Access protection via password and keyswitch

11.1.1 General

Access rights User access to programs, data, and functions is restricted on the basis of 8
hierarchical protection levels. These are divided into (see Table 12-1):

S 4 password levels for Siemens, machine manufacturers, and end users and
S 4 keyswitch settings for end users
This provides a multi-level safety system for controlling access rights.

Table 11-1 Access protection

Protection
level Type User Access to (examples)

0 Pass- Siemens All functions, programs and data

word

1 Pass- Machine manufacturer: Defined functions, programs and data;

word Development e.g.: Enter options

2 Pass- Machine manufacturer: Defined functions, programs and data;

word Start-up engineer e.g.: Most machine data settings

3 Pass- End user: Assigned functions, programs and data

word Service

4 Key- End user: Less than protection level 0 to 3;

switch Programmer as defined by machine manufacturer or
setting 3 Machine setter end user

5 Key- End user: Less than protection level 0 to 3;

switch Qualified operator, defined by end user
setting 2 who is not a programmer Decreasing
access rights
6 Key- End user: Example:
switch Trained operator, Only program selection, input of tool wear
pos. 1 who is not a programmer and zero offsets

7 Key- End user: Example:

switch Semi-skilled operator No inputs or program selection
setting 0 permitted, inputs via machine control panel only

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 11-193
11 Miscellaneous 11.03
11.1 Access protection via password and keyswitch

Access protection
system S Protection level 0 offers the highest access authorization and protection
level 7 the lowest.

S If a particular access right is assigned to a protection level, the same right

will be automatically available on all higher protection levels.

S By the same token, an access right for a particular protection level can only
be changed from a higher protection level.

S The access rights on protection levels 0 to 3 are set as Siemens defaults.

S Access authorization is set by scanning of the current keyswitch
position and comparing password entries. In this case, a password entry
overwrites the access rights associated with the keyswitch position.

S Options can be saved on all protection levels, but option data can only be
input on protection levels 0 and 1.

S The access rights for protection levels 4 to 7 are merely suggested settings
and can be altered by the machine manufacturer or end user.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

11-194 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 11 Miscellaneous
11.1 Access protection via password and keyswitch

11.1.2 Password

Set password The passwords for the 4 available password levels with their respective
access authorization can be entered in the DIAGNOSIS operating area by se-
lecting softkey SET PASSWORD.
References: /BEM/, Operator’s Guide HMI Embedded or
/BAD/, Operator’s Guide HMI Advanced

Reset password Please note that a password remains valid until the access authorization
is intentionally reset again with softkey DELETE PASSWORD.
In other words, access authorization is not automatically reset by a
POWER ON!

Permitted charac- Up to 8 characters can be used in the password. We recommend only using the
ters character set of the operator panel for a password. In passwords with fewer
than 8 characters, the remaining characters are interpreted as blanks.

Default passwords The following default passwords are defined for protection levels 1 to 3:
Protection level 1 SUNRISE
Protection level 2 EVENING
Protection level 3 CUSTOMER

Note
These passwords are entered as the defaults on system power-up in start-up
mode (NCK start-up switch in position 1).
The default passwords should be changed to ensure reliable access protec-
tion.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 11-195
11 Miscellaneous 11.03
11.1 Access protection via password and keyswitch

11.1.3 Keyswitch settings

Keyswitch The keyswitch has 4 positions to which protection levels 4 to 7 are assigned.
The keyswitch is operated by 3 colored keys that can be removed from the lock
in different positions (see Table 11-2). Functions can be assigned to the key
positions by the machine manufacturer or end user. Access to programs, data
and functions can be set user-specifically in machine data (see Subsection
11.1.4 “Machine data for protection levels”).
The keyswitch positions are transferred to the PLC interface (interface signals
“Keyswitch positions 0 to 3” (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7)) for evaluation by the PLC
user program.
Keyswitch position 0 has access rights of the lowest priority and position 3 ac-
cess rights of the highest priority. For example, all data that can be changed in
positions 0, 1, or 2 can also be changed in keyswitch position 3.

Application of key- The keyswitch can be used to inhibit access to certain data areas. This protec-
switch tive function can be used, for example, to prevent the operator from making
unintentional changes to geometry data (e.g. zero offsets) or activating program
controls (e.g. selection of dry run feedrate).

Table 11-2 Keyswitch positions 0 to 3

Switch position Key removal posit. DB10, DBB 56 Protection level

Position 0 – Bit 4 7

Position 1 0 or 1 Bit 5 6
Black key

Position 2 0 or 1 or 2 Bit 6 5
Green key

0 or 1 or 2
Position 3 or 3 Bit 7 4
Red key

Control of PLC The PLC interface signals (“Keyswitch positions 0 to 3”) can be input either di-
user program rectly via the keyswitch on the machine control panel or by the PLC user pro-
gram. Only one interface signal may be set at a time. If several interface signals
are set simultaneously, keyswitch position 3 is activated internally in the control.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

11-196 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 11 Miscellaneous
11.1 Access protection via password and keyswitch

11.1.4 Machine data for protection levels

Lockable data The machine manufacturer or end user can set MMC machine data to assign
areas the appropriate protection levels to individual functions and data areas. For a
number of data types, it is possible to input different protection levels for read
and write access authority.
Here is a list of the machine data that can be “locked” by means of protection
levels in ShopMill:
Operator panel machine data Access to
9182 USER_CLASS_INCH_METRIC Inch/metric switchover
9200 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA Read tool offsets
9201 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO Write tool geometry
(including type and tool edge)
9202 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR Write tool wear (without
limit value)
9203 USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE Write tool wear, fine, and
fine offsets
9210 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA Write coarse offsets
9215 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA Write setting data
9216 USER_CLASS_READ_PROGRAMM Read program
9217 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PROGRAM Write/edit program
9218 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM Enable program selection
9222 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA Write R parameters
9252 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLLOAD Enable tool load
9253 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLUNLOAD Enable tool unload
9258 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCNEWTOOL Enable create a new tool
9259 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCDELTOOL Enable delete a tool
9510 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_P Enable network drive 1
9511 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_P Enable network drive 2
9512 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_P Enable network drive 3
9513 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P Enable network drive 4

Default setting These machine data are assigned protection level 7 by default during the stan-
dard start-up procedure. This means all these data areas and functions can be
accessed and altered in keyswitch position 0.
The protection level defaults may need to be changed by the machine manufac-
turer or end user. They can also be set to protection levels 0 to 3.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 11-197
11 Miscellaneous 11.03
11.2 ISO dialects

11.2 ISO dialects

Under ShopMill, you can also create and execute ISO dialect programs. How to
set up ISO dialects is described below:
References: /FBFA/, Description of Functions ISO Dialects
The “ISO dialects” function is a software option with order number
6FC5 253-0AE00-0AA0.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

11-198 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 11 Miscellaneous
11.3 Spindle control

11.3 Spindle control

The ShopMill spindle control has the following special features:

End of program ShopMill makes a distinction between M2/M30 (end of program of a ShopMill
program) and the M function set in MD 10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP (end of
program of a program generated in operating mode “Manual” or “MDA”).
MD 35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET=2 causes the NCK to switch
off the spindle on M2/M30 but not on the M function set in MD 10714
$MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP.
The ShopMill-PLC also stops the spindle on M30 or RESET but not on the set
M function.
One of the benefits of this functionality is that the spindle can be started at any
time in manual mode (e.g. for scratching).
ShopMill uses the following M functions affecting the end of program:

S M function from MD 10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP: End of main program,

spindle continues

S M2, M30: End of main program and jump back to beginning of program,
spindle stops

S M17: End of subroutine and jump back to main program, spindle continues

Keys The keys “Spindle CW”, “Spindle CCW” and “Spindle stop” triggers the ShopMill
PLC input signals DB82 DBX9.1 “spindle_start”, DB82 DBX9.4 “spindle_right”
(=CW), DB82 DBX9.3 “spindle_left” (=CCW) and DB82 DBX9.2 “spindle_stop”.
The ShopMill PLC program writes the following interface signals to the signal
data block:
DB3x.DBX30.0 Spindle Stop
DB3x.DBX30.1 Spindle Start CW Rotation
DB3x.DBX30.2 Spindle Start CCW Rotation
The spindle can be started and stopped when the channel is in the Reset state
(DB21.DBX35.7=1) or when the channel status is “interrupted”
(DB21.DBX35.6=1) and the program status is “interrupted” (DB21.DBX35.3=1).

Note
To stop the spindle when the program is running, interface signal “Feed Stop/
Spindle Stop” must be set in the user PLC (DB3x.DBX4.3).

The spindle control can be deactivated via interface signal DB82.DBX9.0.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 11-199
11 Miscellaneous 11.03
11.4 Automatically generated programs

11.4 Automatically generated programs

ShopMill creates several programs automatically during operation.

Directory of part programs:
CMM_SINGLE The program is created when a function is executed in the “Manual” operating
mode. The ShopMill PLC switches internally to the “Automatic” operating mode,
processes the “CMM_SINGLE” program and returns to the “Jog” operating
mode.

CMM_MDI The G code records programmed under “MDI” are saved in this program.

INPUT_DATA_MM The parameter values last entered in a mask are saved in this program, inde-
INPUT_DATA_IN pendent of the unit of measurement. (INPUT_DATA_MM = values with the unit
“mm”; INPUT_DATA_IN = values with the unit “Inch”)

Directory start-up:
REM_DATA.TRC This program stores the data that must be retained after the machine has been
switched off (e.g. the program last selected).

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

11-200 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 11 Miscellaneous
11.5 Version display

11.5 Version display

You can read the ShopMill and NCU Version on the CNC-ISO operator inter-
face.
You can read the version of the ShopMill-PLC on the ShopMill boot screen.

S Switch to the CNC ISO operator interface.

S Select the menu “Diagnosis” → “Service displays” → “Version” → “NCU Ver-
sion”.
The NCU Version will appear at the top in the window displayed:
xx.yy.zz 810D or 840D

S Select the “MMC Version” menu.

You can read the ShopMill version in the list that is displayed.
PCU 50: ShopMill............. V xx.yy.zz
PCU 20: cmm.dll.............. V xx.yy.zz

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 11-201
11 Miscellaneous 11.03
11.6 Mold making

11.6 Mold making

In addition to the programs used for 2 1/2D machining, ShopMill can also pro-
cess mold making programs. The mold making programs cannot only run on
special mold making machines, but also on traditional milling machines used for
2 1/2D machining.
These milling machines, however, have to be optimized in order to process
mold making programs so that cou can obtain top velocity control.

11.6.1 Startup

The following steps must be performed to obtain top velocity control:

S Set NC machine data

S Optimize drive
S Preconfigure “High Speed Settings” cycle and adapt, if necessary

NC machine The NC machine data to be set are included in the file CMM.8x0 in section “ad-
data ditional settings for mold and die”. That means, these machine data are set au-
tomatically when starting up the NC.

Note
Please observe that the settings of some machine data depend on the CNC
system or are based on specific axes, i.e. you have to set these machine data.

Drive To adapt the drive in order to process mold making programs, you must opti-
optimization mize all controllers (current controller, speed controller, position controller), jerk
values and the feedforward control via machine–specific machine data and then
check these settings by performing a circularity test and checking the contour
accuracy (corners, radii).
The controllers, jerk values and the feedforward control should be optimized
with active compressor function so that this can be activated later without reopti-
mizing these devices/values again.
The compressor function has already been taken into account for the settings of
the machine data described in the file CMM.8x0.
The compressor function is integrated in the option “Spline interpolation (A, B
and C splines/compressor function)” (order number 6FC5251–0AA14–0AA0).
We have listed the primary machine–specific machine data in the following. This
list does not claim to be complete.

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

11-202 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 11 Miscellaneous
11.6 Mold making

Table 11-3 Machine–specific machine data

Channel–specific MD/SDs
20600 $MC_MAX_PATH_JERK
20602 $MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL
20603 $MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK
Axis–specific and drive–related MD/SDs
32200 $MA_POSCTRL_GAIN[n]
32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL
32431 $MA_MAX_AX_JERK
32432 $MA_PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM
32433 $MA_SOFT_ACCEL_FACTOR
32434 $MA_G00_ACCEL_FACTOR
32435 $MA_G00_JERK_FACTOR
32810 $MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME[n]
1004 $MD_CTRL_CONFIG = 1000
1407 $MD_SPEEDCTRL_GAIN_1[n]
1409 $MD_SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1[n]
1414 $MD_SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ
1500 $MD_NUM_SPEED_FILTERS[n]
1501 $MD_SPEED_FILTER_TYPE[n]
1503 $MD_SPEED_FILTER_2_TIME[n]

“High Speed The optimum velocity control for machining is set within the mold making pro-
Settings” cycle gram by means of the the “High Speed Settings” cycle (CYCLE 832). This cycle
is supplied with ShopMill.
You have to preconfigure the cycle, i.e. you must preassign the parameters
independently of the machining type (roughing, rough–finishing, finishing).
In addition, you can adapt the “High Speed Settings” cycle for specific machines
in order to further optimize processing of the mold making program. To do this,
you can use the cycle “CYC_832T”.

Note
The “High Speed Settings” cycle only serves for setting the NC functions for
velocity control. That means, the drives must be optimized as described above.

You can call up the “High Speed Settings” cycle via the cycle support in the
G code editor of ShopMill.
Further information on the cycles “High Speed Settings” and “CYC_832T” is
given in:
References: /PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition 11-203
11 Miscellaneous 11.03
11.6 Mold making

11.6.2 Data storage, data transfer

Data storage To activate the optimization of velocity control by the “High Speed Settings” cy-
cle, the mold making programs must be split up into a technological program
and a geometrical program. The technological program comprises basis set-
tings such as work offset, tool, feed, spindle speed, etc. The geometrical pro-
gram comprises only geometrical values of the free–form surface to be machi-
ned.
Depending on the application, geometrical programs have a size ranging from
500 KB to 100 MB. Programs of this size can no longer be processed directly in
the NC user memory. That means. the geometrical programs must be stored
either on the hard disk of the PCU 50 or on a Compact Flash Card in the PCU
20.
The Compact Flash Card is not supplied with the PCU 20 and must be ordered
separately (32 MB: order number 6FC5313–1AG00–0AA0, 64 MB: order num-
ber 6FC5313–2AG00–0AA0). The Compact Flash Card can be integrated into
the program manager as network drive.

Note
Due to the slower memory access times of the Compact Flash Card, we recom-
mend that you use a PCU 50 for geometrical programs with more than 2 MB.

Data transfer In order to copy a mold making program from a network drive into the control
system, you have to use an Ethernet link. The data transfer rate of the serial
interface (RS232, V.24) is not sufficiently high for transferring very large part
programs.
If you wish to process a mold making program from a network drive, we recom-
mend that you establish a point–to–point connection between the control sy-
stem and the network drive, since a continuous transfer of data is ensured only
then.
On account of the low data transfer rate, we do not recommend that you pro-
cess programs via the V.24 interface on the PCU 20.
J

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

11-204 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Abbreviations A
ASUB Asynchronous SUBprogram

BP Basic Program

CCU Compact Control Unit

CNC Computerized Numerical Control

COM Communication

CPU Central Processing Unit

DB Data Block

DBB Data Block Byte

DBW Data Block Word

DBX Data Block Bit

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

FB Function Block

FC Function Call, function block on the PLC

GUD Global User Data

HPU Handheld Programming Unit

HSK Horizontal Softkey

INC INCrement: Incremental dimension

IS Interface Signal

ISA Industry Standard Architecture

MCP Machine Control Panel

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition A-205
A Abbreviations 11.03

MD Machine Data

MDA Manual Data Automatic

MPF Main Program File: NC part program (main program)

MPI Multipoint Interface

NC Numerical Control
The NC comprises the components NCK, PLC, PCU and COM.

NCK Numerical Control Kernel (kernel with block preparation, traversing range, etc.)

NCU Numerical Control Unit: NC module

OB Organization Block on the PLC

OP Operator Panel

PC Personal Computer

PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association

PCU Personal Computer Unit:

NC component which enables communication between the operator and the
machine.

PG Programming unit

PLC Programmable Logic Controller:

NC component for processing control logic on the machine tool.

RAM Random Access Memory in which data can be read and written

RS-232 Serial interface

(definition of interchange circuit between DTE and DCE)

SD Setting Data

SK Softkey

SPF SubProgram File

SRAM Static Random Access Memory (buffered)

SW Software

T Tool

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

A-206 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 A Abbreviations

T No. Tool Number

TOA Tool Offset Active: Identifier for tool offsets

TOOLMAN Tool Management

VSK Vertical Softkey

J

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition A-207
A Abbreviations 11.03

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

A-208 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
References B
General Documentation

/BU/ SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE, Automation Systems for Machine Tools

Catalog NC 60
Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A9-7600

/IKPI/ Industrial Communication and Field Devices

Catalog IK PI
Order No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B2-7600

/ST7/ SIMATIC
Products for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro Automation
Catalog ST 70
Order No.: E86060-K4670-A111-A8-7600

/Z/ MOTION-CONNECT
Cable, Connectors & System Components for SIMATIC, SINUMERIK,
Masterdrives and SIMOTION
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-B1-7600

Electronic Documentation

/CD1/ The SINUMERIK System (11.02 Edition)

DOC ON CD
(includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802D/802SC and SIMODRIVE
publications)
Order No.: 6FC5298-6CA00-0BG3

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition B-209
B References 11.03

User Documentation

/AUK/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.99 Edition)

Short Guide AutoTurn Operation
Order No.: 6FC5298-4AA30-0BP2

/AUP/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.02 Edition)

Operator’s Guide AutoTurn Graphic Programming System
Programming/Setup
Order No.: 6FC5298-4AA40-0BP3

/BA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (10.00 Edition)

Operator’s Guide MMC
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA00-0BP0

/BAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operator’s Guide HMI Advanced
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF00-0BP2

/BAH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operator’s Guide HT 6
Order No.: 6FC5298-0AD60-0BP2

/BAK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (02.01 Edition)

Short Guide Operation
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA10-0BP0

/BAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.02 Edition)

Operation/Programming ManualTurn
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD00-0BP0

/BAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.03 Edition)

Operation/Programming ShopMill
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP2

/BAT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (06.03 Edition)

Operation/Programming ShopTurn
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2

/BEM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operator’s Guide HMI Embedded
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP2

/BNM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

User’s Guide Measuring Cycles
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA70-0BP2

/BTDI/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (04.03 Edition)

Motion Control Information System (MCIS)
User’s Guide Tool Data Information
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE01-0BP0

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

B-210 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 B References

/CAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition)

Operator’s Guide CAD Reader
Order No.: (included in online help)

/DA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Diagnostics Guide
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA20-0BP3

/KAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition)

Short Guide ManualTurn
Order No.: 6FC5298-5AD40-0BP0

/KAS/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition)

Short Guide ShopMill
Order No.: 6FC5298-5AD30-0BP0

/KAT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (07.01 Edition)

Short Guide ShopTurn
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF20-0BP0

/PG/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide Fundamentals
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB00-0BP2

/PGA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide Advanced
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB10-0BP2

/PGK/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (10.00 Edition)

Short Guide Programming
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB30-0BP0

/PGM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide ISO Milling
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC20-0BP2

/PGT/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Programming Guide ISO Turning (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AC10-0BP2

/PGZ/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Programming Guide Cycles
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AB40-0BP2

/PI/ PCIN 4.4

Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module
Order No.: 6FX2060 4AA00-4XB0 (English, French, German)
Order from: WK Fürth

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition B-211
B References 11.03

/SYI/ SINUMERIK 840Di (02.01 Edition)

System Overview
Order No.: 6FC5298-6AE40-0BP0

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

a) Lists
/LIS/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)
SIMODRIVE 611D
Lists
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AB70-0BP3

b) Hardware

/ASAL/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition)

Planning Guide General Information for Asynchronous Motors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC62-0BP0

/APH2/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1PH2 Asynchronous Motors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC63-0BP0

/APH4/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1PH4 Asynchronous Motors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC64-0BP0

/APH7/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1PH7 Asynchronous Motors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC65-0BP0

/APL6/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1PL6 Asynchronous Motors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC66-0BP0

/BH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Operator Components Manual (HW)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AA50-0BP2

/BHA/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (03.03 Edition)

User’s Guide (HW) Absolute Position Sensor with Profibus-DP
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP2

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

B-212 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 B References

/EMV/ SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE (06.99 Edition)

Planning Guide (HW) EMC Installation Guide
Order No.: 6FC5297-0AD30-0BP1

The current Declaration of Conformity is available under the following Internet

address:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de

Please enter the ID No.: 15257461 in the ’Search’ field (top right) and click on
’go’.

/GHA/ SINUMERIK/SIMOTION
ADI4 – Analog Drive Interface for 4 Axes (02.03 Edition)
Manual
Order No.: 6FC5297-0BA01-0BP1

/PFK6/ SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FK6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD05-0BP0

/PFK7/ SIMODRIVE (01.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FK7 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD06-0BP0

/PFS6/ SIMODRIVE (06.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FS6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD08-0BP0

/PFT5/ SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FT5 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD01-0BP0

/PFT6/ SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FT6 Three-Phase AC Servomotors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD02-0BP0

/PHC/ SINUMERIK 810D

Configuring Manual CCU (HW) (11.02 Edition)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD10-0BP1

/PHD/ SINUMERIK 840D (09.03 Edition)

Configuring Manual NCU (HW)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC10-0BP2

/PJAL/ SIMODRIVE 611 / Masterdrives MC (01.03 Edition)

Planning Guide Three-Phase AC Servomotors
General Part
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD07-0BP0

/PJAS/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition)

Planning Guide Asynchronous Motors (Compendium)
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC61-0BP0

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition B-213
B References 11.03

/PJFE/ SIMODRIVE (02.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FE1 Built-In Synchronous Motors
Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC00-0BP4

/PJF1/ SIMODRIVE (12.02 Edition)

Installation Guide 1FE1 051.–1FE1 147. Built-In Synchronous Motors
Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 610.43000.02

/PJLM/ SIMODRIVE (06.02 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FN1, 1FN3 Linear Motors
ALL General Information about Linear Motors
1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor
CON Connections
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB70-0BP4

/PJM/ SIMODRIVE (11.00 Edition)

Planning Guide Motors
Three-Phase AC Servo Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC20-0BP0

/PJM2/ SIMODRIVE (07.03 Edition)

Planning Guide Servomotors
Three-Phase AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA20-0BP4

/PJTM/ SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FW6 Integrated Torque Motors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD00-0BP0

/PJU/ SIMODRIVE 611 (02.03 Edition)

Planning Guide Inverters
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA00-0BP6

/PKTM/ SIMODRIVE (09.03 Edition)

Planning Guide 1FW3 Complete Torque Motors
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC70-0BP0

/PMH/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (07.02 Edition)

Configuring/Installation Guide (HW)
Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP1

/PMHS/ SIMODRIVE (12.00 Edition)

Installation Guide Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives
SIZAG2 Toothed-Wheel Encoder
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB00-0YP3

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

B-214 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 B References

/PMS/ SIMODRIVE (02.03 Edition)

Planning Guide ECO Motor Spindle for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD04-0BP1

/PPH/ SIMODRIVE (12.01 Edition)

Planning Guide 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7 Motors
AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC60-0BP0

/PPM/ SIMODRIVE (11.01 Edition)

Planning Guide Hollow-Shaft Motors
for 1PM4 and 1PM6 Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD03-0BP0

c) Software
/FB1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)
Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC20-0BP1
A2 Various Interface Signals
A3 Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones
B1 Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead
B2 Acceleration
D1 Diagnostic Tools
D2 Interactive Programming
F1 Travel to Fixed Stop
G2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop
Control
H2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC
K1 Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation Mode
K2 Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual-Value System for
Workpiece, External Zero Offset
K4 Communication
N2 EMERGENCY STOP
P1 Transverse Axes
P3 Basic PLC Program
R1 Reference Point Approach
S1 Spindles
V1 Feeds
W1 Tool Offset

/FB2/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2) (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Extended Functions (Part 2)
including FM-NC: Turning, Stepper Motor
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC30-0BP2
A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/Os
B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs
B4 Operation via PG/PC
F3 Remote Diagnostics
H1 JOG with/without Handwheel
K3 Compensations
K5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement
L1 FM-NC Local Bus
M1 Kinematic Transformation
M5 Measurement

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition B-215
B References 11.03

N3 Software Cams, Position Switching Signals

N4 Punching and Nibbling
P2 Positioning Axes
P5 Oscillation
R2 Rotary Axes
S3 Synchronous Spindles
S5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3)
S6 Stepper Motor Control
S7 Memory Configuration
T1 Indexing Axes
W3 Tool Change
W4 Grinding

/FB3/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2) (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Special Functions (Part 3)
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC80-0BP2
F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation
G1 Gantry Axes
G3 Cycle Times
K6 Contour Tunnel Monitoring
M3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling
S8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding
T3 Tangential Control
TE0 Installation and Activation of Compile Cycles
TE1 Clearance Control
TE2 Analog Axis
TE3 Master-Slave for Drives
TE4 Transformation Package Handling
TE5 Setpoint Exchange
TE6 MCS Coupling
TE7 Retrace Support
TE8 Path-Synchronous Switch Signal
V2 Preprocessing
W5 3D Tool Radius Compensation

/FBA/ SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Drive Functions
(the various sections are listed below)
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA80-1BP0
DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions
DD1 Diagnostic Functions
DD2 Speed Control Loop
DE1 Extended Drive Functions
DF1 Enable Commands
DG1 Encoder Parameterization
DL1 Linear Motor MD
DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and
Controller Data
DS1 Current Control Loop
DÜ1 Monitors/Limitations

/FBAN/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (02.00 Edition)

Description of Functions ANA MODULE
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB80-0BP0

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

B-216 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 B References

/FBD/ SINUMERIK 840D (07.99 Edition)

Description of Functions Digitizing
Order No.: 6FC5297-4AC50-0BP0
DI1 Start-up
DI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan)
DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser)
DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)

/FBDN/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.03 Edition)

Motion Control Information System (MCIS)
Description of Functions DNC NC Program Management
Order No.: 6FC5297-1AE80-0BP0
DN1 DNC Plant / DNC Cell
DN2 DNC IFC SINUMERIK, NC Data Transfer via Network

/FBFA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE10-0BP3

/FBFE/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (04.03 Edition)

Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis
Order No.: 6FC5297-0AF00-0BP2
FE1 Remote Diagnosis ReachOut
FE3 Remote Diagnosis pcAnywhere

/FBH/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

HMI Configuring Package
Order No.: (supplied with the software)

Part 1 User’s Guide

Part 2 Description of Functions

/FBH1/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.03 Edition)

HMI Configuring Package
ProTool/Pro Option SINUMERIK
Order No.: (supplied with the software)

/FBHL/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions HLA Module
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB60-0BP3

/FBIC/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition)

Motion Control Information System (MCIS)
Description of Functions TDI Ident Connection
Order No.: 6FC5297-1AE60-0BP0

/FBMA/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.02 Edition)

Description of Functions ManualTurn
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD50-0BP0

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition B-217
B References 11.03

/FBO/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.01 Edition)

Description of Functions Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC40-0BP0
BA Operator’s Guide
EU Development Environment (Configuring Package)
PS Online only: Configuring Syntax (Configuring Package)
PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface
IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration

/FBP/ SINUMERIK 840D (03.96 Edition)

Description of Functions C-PLC Programming
Order No.: 6FC5297-3AB60-0BP0

/FBR/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.01 Edition)

IT Solutions
Description of Functions Computer Link (SinCOM)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD60-0BP0
NFL Host Computer Interface
NPL PLC/NCK Interface

/FBSI/ SINUMERIK 840D / SIMODRIVE 611 digital (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AB80-0BP1

/FBSP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.03 Edition)

Description of Functions ShopMill
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD80-0BP2

/FBST/ SIMATIC (01.01 Edition)

Description of Functions FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA70-0YP4

/FBSY/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (10.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Synchronized Actions
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD40-0BP2

/FBT/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (06.03 Edition)

Description of Functions ShopTurn
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD70-0BP2

/FBTC/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (01.02 Edition)

IT Solutions
SINUMERIK Tool Data Communication SinTDC
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6FC5297-5AF30-0BP0

/FBTD/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.01 Edition)

IT Solutions
Tool Information System (SinTDI) with Online Help
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE00-0BP0

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

B-218 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 B References

/FBTP/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (01.03 Edition)

Motion Control Information System (MCIS)
Description of Functions TPM Total Productive Maintenance, Version 3.0
Order No.: Document is supplied with the software

/FBU/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E (02.03 Edition)

Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and Positioning
Description of Functions
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB20-0BP7

/FBU2/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal (04.02 Edition)

Installation Guide (enclosed with SIMODRIVE 611 universal)

/FBW/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Description of Functions Tool Management
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC60-0BP1

/HBA/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition)

Manual @Event
Order No.: 6AU1900-0CL20-0BA0

/HBI/ SINUMERIK 840Di (09.02 Edition)

Manual
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE60-0BP1

/INC/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition)

System Description Commissioning Tool SINUMERIK SinuCOM NC
Order No.: (an integral part of the online help for the start-up tool)

/PJE/ SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.01 Edition)

Description of Functions Configuring Package HMI Embedded
Software Update, Configuration Installation
Order No.: 6FC5297-6EA10-0BP0
(the document PS Configuring Syntax is supplied with the software
and available as a pdf file)

/POS1/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (05.03 Edition)

User’s Guide Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP
Order No.: 6SN2197-0AA00-0BP5

/POS2/ SIMODRIVE POSMO A (04.02 Edition)

Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO A)

/POS3/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA (02.03 Edition)

User’s Guide Distributed Servo Drive Systems
Order No.: 6SN2197-0AA20-0BP4

/POS4/ SIMODRIVE POSMO SI (04.02 Edition)

Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO SI)

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition B-219
B References 11.03

/POS5/ SIMODRIVE POSMO CD/CA (04.02 Edition)

Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO CD/CA)

/S7H/ SIMATIC S7–300 (2002 Edition)

– Manual: CPU Data (Hardware)
– Reference Manual: Module Data
– Manual: Technological Functions
– Installation Manual
Order No.: 6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0

/S7HT/ SIMATIC S7–300 (03.97 Edition)

Manual: STEP 7, Fundamentals, V. 3.1
Order No.: 6ES7 10-4CA02-8BA0

/S7HR/ SIMATIC S7–300 (03.97 Edition)

Manual: STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1
Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BR0

/S7S/ SIMATIC S7–300 (04.02 Edition)

FM 353 Positioning Module for Stepper Drive
Order together with configuring package

/S7L/ SIMATIC S7–300 (04.02 Edition)

FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo Drive
Order together with configuring package

/S7M/ SIMATIC S7–300 (01.03 Edition)

FM 357-2 Multimodule for Servo and Stepper Drives
Order together with configuring package

/SP/ SIMODRIVE 611–A/611–D

SimoPro 3.1
Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives
Order No.: 6SC6111-6PC00-0BAj, Order from: WK Fürth

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

B-220 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
11.03 B References

d) Installation and
Start-Up

/BS/ SIMODRIVE 611 analog (10.00 Edition)

Description Start-Up Software for Main Spindle and Asynchronous
Motor Modules
Version 3.20
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA30-0BP1
/IAA/ SIMODRIVE 611A (10.00 Edition)
Installation and Start-Up Guide
Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA60-0BP6

/IAC/ SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition)

Installation and Start-Up Guide
(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD20-0BP0

/IAD/ SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (11.02 Edition)

Installation and Start-Up Guide
(incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611 digital start-up software)
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AB10-0BP2

/IAM/ SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)

Installation and Start-Up Guide HMI/MMC
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE20-0BP2
AE1 Updates/Supplements
BE1 Expanding the Operator Interface
HE1 Online Help
IM2 Starting up HMI Embedded
IM4 Starting up HMI Advanced
TX1 Creating Foreign Language Texts

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition B-221
B References 11.03

Notes

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

B-222 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
Index C
F
FB110, 8-121
FC 90, 5-51
A FC100, 8-121
Acceptance report, 4-38 FC30...35, 5-43
Access protection, 11-193
Access protection features, 11-194
Access rights, 11-193 H
Additional Functions, 9-153
Hardware, 1-13
Application disks
Basic components, 1-13
Installing on PC card, 4-24
Operator components, 1-13
Installing on PC/PG, 4-23
System structure, 1-13
HEADER.INI, 10-189
High Speed Settings, 11-203
B
Basic components, 1-13
I
Initial start-up, 4-22
C Input signals, 6-56
CLAMP.SPF, 9-177 Interface DB 19, 6-55
Configuration file, 8-113 Interface signals, 6-55
Examples, 8-113 Interface signals for ShopMill, 5-46
Variables, 8-116 Interlocking logic, 5-53
Coolant, 8-135 Interpolator, 7-79
Customer booting display, 10-181 ISO dialects, 11-198
Customer–Specific Operator Interface, 10-181
Cycles, User-configured, 10-183
Cylinder surface transformation, 9-173 K
Axis configuration, 9-174
Keyswitch, 11-196
Groove wall offset, 9-173

D L
Lockable data areas, 11-197
DB71, 8-124
DB72, 8-125
Default password, 11-195
Diagnostic buffer signals, 6-77 M
Diagnostics buffer signals, 6-58
Machine control panel, 5-51
Diagnostics function for NC signals, 5-54
19’’, 5-52
Display machine data, 7-81
OP032S, 5-53
Machine data, 7-79
Display, 7-81
E Measuring cycles, 9-161
NC , 7-79
End of program, 11-199
Manual tools, 8-134
Entry softkey, 10-183
Measuring cycle support, 9-179
Example sources, 5-42

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition C-223
C Index 11.03

Measuring cycles ShopMill Classic, 4-26

Display machine data, 9-162 ShopMill interface, 5-44
Functional check, 9-156 ShopMill interface DB 82, 6-60
I/O interface, 9-154 ShopMill Open, 10-188
Probe machine data, 9-161 ShopMill PLC program, 5-43
Mold making, 11-202 Software start-up
Multiple clamping, 9-177 Data communication, 4-19
ShopMill, 4-19
Spindle control, 11-199
Spindle direction of rotation, 8-135
N Start–up
NC machine data, 7-79 PCU 20, 4-23, 4-26
NCU load, 7-79 Sequence, 4-22
Network drive, Linking, 9-170, 9-171 Start-up
Initial, 4-22
Measuring cycles, 9-158
NC, 4-31
O PLC, 4-37
OB1, 5-48 Preconditions, 4-19
OB100, 5-50 Series, 4-39
OP hotkeys, 10-191 Status display, 10-189
Operator components, 1-13 Supplementary conditions, 2-15
Output signals, 6-57 Support, Measuring cycles, 9-179
Swivel heads, 9-176
Swivel tables, 9-176
P System disks, Installing on PC/PG, 4-23

Password, 11-195
reset, 11-195
set, 11-195 T
PC card Texts, tool-specific, 8-137
Creating, 4-24 to_mill.ini, 8-143
Loading, 4-25 to_turn.ini, 8-142
PLC Tool change cycle, 8-131
Diagnostics buffer signals, 6-58 Tool management, 8-101
Interface signals, 6-55 Configuring the operator interface, 8-141
Program, 5-41 Display machine data, 8-130
Program structure, 5-41 NC machine data, 8-105
ShopMill interface DB 82, 6-56 Overview of functions, 8-101
PLC keys, 10-191 Start–up, 8-104
PLC Toolbox, 4-20 Start–up NC, 8-105
Preconditions start-up, 4-19 Start–up PLC, 8-119
Probe connection, 9-154 Tool–specific functions, 8-135
Programs, Generated automatically, 11-200 Toolbox, 4-20
Protection levels, 11-197 TRACYL, 9-173

R U
Reserved functions, 3-17 Upgrade, 4-39
User screen form, 10-183
User status display, 10-189
S
Screen form, User-configured, 10-183
Series start-up, 4-39 V
ShopMill, 5-44 Version display, 11-201
ShopMill blocks, 5-42

 Siemens AG, 2003. All rights reserved

C-224 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP) – 11.03 Edition
 To Suggestions
SIEMENS AG Corrections
A&D MC BMS For Publication/Manual:
P.O. Box 3180
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
D–91050 Erlangen, Germany
ShopMill
Phone: ++49-(0)180-5050-222 [Hotline]
Fax: ++49-(0)9131-98-2176 [Documentation]
E-mail: [email protected] Manufacturer/Service Documentation

Description of Functions
From
Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD80-0BP2
Name Edition: 11.03

Company/Dept. Should you come across any printing errors

when reading this publication, please notify us
Address on this sheet.
Suggestions for improvement are also wel-
come.
Phone: /
Telefax: /

Suggestions and/or corrections

Siemens AG
Automation & Drives
Motion Control Systems
P.O. Box 3180, D-91050 Erlangen © Siemens AG, 2003
Subject to change without prior notice
Germany Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD80-0BP2

www.ad.siemens.de Printed in Germany